This commit was manufactured by cvs2svn to create tag

'LAST_WITH_IFDEF_QT'.

git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/tags/LAST_WITH_IFDEF_QT@11451 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775

contrib/src/xrc/xh_html.cpp

@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        xh_html.cpp
-// Purpose:     XRC resource for wxHtmlWindow
-// Author:      Bob Mitchell
-// Created:     2000/03/21
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Bob Mitchell and Verant Interactive
-// Licence:     wxWindows licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
- 
-#ifdef __GNUG__
-#pragma implementation "xh_html.h"
-#endif
-
-// For compilers that support precompilation, includes "wx.h".
-#include "wx/wxprec.h"
-
-#ifdef __BORLANDC__
-    #pragma hdrstop
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/xrc/xh_html.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/html/htmlwin.h"
-#include "wx/filesys.h"
-
-
-wxHtmlWindowXmlHandler::wxHtmlWindowXmlHandler() 
-: wxXmlResourceHandler() 
-{
-    XRC_ADD_STYLE(wxHW_SCROLLBAR_NEVER);
-    XRC_ADD_STYLE(wxHW_SCROLLBAR_AUTO);
-    AddWindowStyles();
-}
-
-wxObject *wxHtmlWindowXmlHandler::DoCreateResource()
-{
-    XRC_MAKE_INSTANCE(control, wxHtmlWindow)
-
-    control->Create(m_parentAsWindow,
-                    GetID(),
-                    GetPosition(), GetSize(),
-                    GetStyle(wxT("style"), wxHW_SCROLLBAR_AUTO),
-                    GetName());
-
-    if (HasParam(wxT("borders")))
-    {
-        control->SetBorders(GetDimension(wxT("borders")));
-    }
-
-    if (HasParam(wxT("url")))
-    {
-        wxString url = GetParamValue(wxT("url"));
-        wxFileSystem& fsys = GetCurFileSystem();
-        
-        wxFSFile *f = fsys.OpenFile(url);
-        if (f)
-        {
-            control->LoadPage(f->GetLocation());
-            delete f;
-        }
-        else
-            control->LoadPage(url);
-    }
-    
-    else if (HasParam(wxT("htmlcode")))
-    {
-        control->SetPage(GetText(wxT("htmlcode")));
-    }
-
-    SetupWindow(control);
-    
-    return control;
-}
-
-bool wxHtmlWindowXmlHandler::CanHandle(wxXmlNode *node)
-{
-    return IsOfClass(node, wxT("wxHtmlWindow"));
-}
-
-#endif // wxUSE_HTML

docs/latex/wx/htcell.tex

@@ -1,262 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlcell.tex at 21/Mar/99 22:45:23
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlCell}}\label{wxhtmlcell}
-
-Internal data structure. It represents fragments of parsed HTML
-page, the so-called {\bf cell} - a word, picture, table, horizontal line and so on.
-It is used by \helpref{wxHtmlWindow}{wxhtmlwindow} and 
-\helpref{wxHtmlWinParser}{wxhtmlwinparser} to represent HTML page in memory.
-
-You can divide cells into two groups : {\it visible} cells with non-zero width and
-height and {\it helper} cells (usually with zero width and height) that
-perform special actions such as color or font change.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlcell.h>
-
-\wxheading{See Also}
-
-\helpref{Cells Overview}{cells},
-\helpref{wxHtmlContainerCell}{wxhtmlcontainercell}
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::wxHtmlCell}\label{wxhtmlcellwxhtmlcell}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlCell}{\void}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::AdjustPagebreak}\label{wxhtmlcelladjustpagebreak}
-
-\func{virtual bool}{AdjustPagebreak}{\param{int * }{pagebreak}}
-
-This method is used to adjust pagebreak position. The parameter is
-variable that contains y-coordinate of page break (= horizontal line that
-should not be crossed by words, images etc.). If this cell cannot be divided
-into two pieces (each one on another page) then it moves the pagebreak
-few pixels up.
-
-Returns true if pagebreak was modified, false otherwise
-
-Usage: 
-\begin{verbatim}
-while (container->AdjustPagebreak(&p)) {}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::Draw}\label{wxhtmlcelldraw}
-
-\func{virtual void}{Draw}{\param{wxDC\& }{dc}, \param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{int }{view\_y1}, \param{int }{view\_y2}}
-
-Renders the cell.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{dc}{Device context to which the cell is to be drawn}
-
-\docparam{x,y}{Coordinates of parent's upper left corner (origin). You must
-add this to m\_PosX,m\_PosY when passing coordinates to dc's methods
-Example : {\tt dc -> DrawText("hello", x + m\_PosX, y + m\_PosY)}}
-
-\docparam{view\_y1}{y-coord of the first line visible in window. This is
-used to optimize rendering speed}
-
-\docparam{view\_y2}{y-coord of the last line visible in window. This is
-used to optimize rendering speed}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::DrawInvisible}\label{wxhtmlcelldrawinvisible}
-
-\func{virtual void}{DrawInvisible}{\param{wxDC\& }{dc}, \param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}}
-
-This method is called instead of \helpref{Draw}{wxhtmlcelldraw} when the
-cell is certainly out of the screen (and thus invisible). This is not
-nonsense - some tags (like \helpref{wxHtmlColourCell}{wxhtmlcolourcell}
-or font setter) must be drawn even if they are invisible!
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{dc}{Device context to which the cell is to be drawn}
-
-\docparam{x,y}{Coordinates of parent's upper left corner. You must
-add this to m\_PosX,m\_PosY when passing coordinates to dc's methods
-Example : {\tt dc -> DrawText("hello", x + m\_PosX, y + m\_PosY)}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::Find}\label{wxhtmlcellfind}
-
-\func{virtual const wxHtmlCell*}{Find}{\param{int }{condition}, \param{const void* }{param}}
-
-Returns pointer to itself if this cell matches condition (or if any of the cells
-following in the list matches), NULL otherwise.
-(In other words if you call top-level container's Find it will
-return pointer to the first cell that matches the condition)
-
-It is recommended way how to obtain pointer to particular cell or
-to cell of some type (e.g. wxHtmlAnchorCell reacts on
-wxHTML\_COND\_ISANCHOR condition)
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{condition}{Unique integer identifier of condition}
-
-\docparam{param}{Optional parameters}
-
-\wxheading{Defined conditions}
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_COND\_ISANCHOR}}{Finds particular anchor. 
-{\it param} is pointer to wxString with name of the anchor.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_COND\_USER}}{User-defined conditions start
-from this number.}
-\end{twocollist}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetDescent}\label{wxhtmlcellgetdescent}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetDescent}{\void}
-
-Returns descent value of the cell (m\_Descent member). 
-\helponly{See explanation:
-
-\image{}{descent.bmp}
-}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetHeight}\label{wxhtmlcellgetheight}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetHeight}{\void}
-
-Returns height of the cell (m\_Height member).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetId}\label{wxhtmlcellgetid}
-
-\constfunc{virtual wxString}{GetId}{\void}
-
-Returns unique cell identifier if there is any, empty string otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetLink}\label{wxhtmlcellgetlink}
-
-\constfunc{virtual wxHtmlLinkInfo*}{GetLink}{\param{int }{x = 0}, \param{int }{y = 0}}
-
-Returns hypertext link if associated with this cell or NULL otherwise.
-See \helpref{wxHtmlLinkInfo}{wxhtmllinkinfo}.
-(Note: this makes sense only for visible tags).
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{x,y}{Coordinates of position where the user pressed mouse button.
-These coordinates are used e.g. by COLORMAP. Values are relative to the
-upper left corner of THIS cell (i.e. from 0 to m\_Width or m\_Height)}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetNext}\label{wxhtmlcellgetnext}
-
-\constfunc{wxHtmlCell*}{GetNext}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to the next cell in list (see htmlcell.h if you're
-interested in details).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetParent}\label{wxhtmlcellgetparent}
-
-\constfunc{wxHtmlContainerCell*}{GetParent}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to parent container.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetPosX}\label{wxhtmlcellgetposx}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetPosX}{\void}
-
-Returns X position within parent (the value is relative to parent's
-upper left corner). The returned value is meaningful only if
-parent's \helpref{Layout}{wxhtmlcelllayout} was called before!
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetPosY}\label{wxhtmlcellgetposy}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetPosY}{\void}
-
-Returns Y position within parent (the value is relative to parent's
-upper left corner). The returned value is meaningful only if
-parent's \helpref{Layout}{wxhtmlcelllayout} was called before!
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::GetWidth}\label{wxhtmlcellgetwidth}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetWidth}{\void}
-
-Returns width of the cell (m\_Width member).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::Layout}\label{wxhtmlcelllayout}
-
-\func{virtual void}{Layout}{\param{int }{w}}
-
-This method performs two actions:
-
-\begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
-\item adjusts the cell's width according to the fact that maximal possible width is {\it w}.
-(this has sense when working with horizontal lines, tables etc.)
-\item prepares layout (=fill-in m\_PosX, m\_PosY (and sometimes m\_Height) members)
-based on actual width {\it w}
-\end{enumerate}
-
-It must be called before displaying cells structure because
-m\_PosX and m\_PosY are undefined (or invalid)
-before calling Layout.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::OnMouseClick}\label{wxhtmlcellonmouseclick}
-
-\func{virtual void}{OnMouseClick}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{int}{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{const wxMouseEvent\& }{event}}
-
-This function is simple event handler. Each time the user clicks mouse button over a cell
-within \helpref{wxHtmlWindow}{wxhtmlwindow} this method of that cell is called. Default behavior is
-that it calls \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::LoadPage}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage}.
-
-\wxheading{Note}
-
-If you need more "advanced" event handling
-you should use wxHtmlBinderCell instead.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{parent}{parent window (always wxHtmlWindow!)}
-
-\docparam{x, y}{coordinates of mouse click (this is relative to cell's origin}
-
-\docparam{left, middle, right}{boolean flags for mouse buttons. true if the left/middle/right
-button is pressed, false otherwise}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::SetId}\label{wxhtmlcellsetid}
-
-\func{void}{SetId}{\param{const wxString\& }{id}}
-
-Sets unique cell identifier. Default value is no identifier, i.e. empty string.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::SetLink}\label{wxhtmlcellsetlink}
-
-\func{void}{SetLink}{\param{const wxHtmlLinkInfo\& }{link}}
-
-Sets the hypertext link associated with this cell. (Default value
-is \helpref{wxHtmlLinkInfo}{wxhtmllinkinfo}("", "") (no link))
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::SetNext}\label{wxhtmlcellsetnext}
-
-\func{void}{SetNext}{\param{wxHtmlCell }{*cell}}
-
-Sets the next cell in the list. This shouldn't be called by user - it is
-to be used only by \helpref{wxHtmlContainerCell::InsertCell}{wxhtmlcontainercellinsertcell}.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::SetParent}\label{wxhtmlcellsetparent}
-
-\func{void}{SetParent}{\param{wxHtmlContainerCell }{*p}}
-
-Sets parent container of this cell. This is called from
-\helpref{wxHtmlContainerCell::InsertCell}{wxhtmlcontainercellinsertcell}.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlCell::SetPos}\label{wxhtmlcellsetpos}
-
-\func{void}{SetPos}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}}
-
-Sets the cell's position within parent container.
-

docs/latex/wx/htcolor.tex

@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlcolourcell.tex at 14/Mar/99 20:13:37
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlColourCell}}\label{wxhtmlcolourcell}
-
-This cell changes the colour of either the background or the foreground. 
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlCell}{wxhtmlcell}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlcell.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlColourCell::wxHtmlColourCell}\label{wxhtmlcolourcellwxhtmlcolourcell}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlColourCell}{\param{wxColour }{clr}, \param{int }{flags = wxHTML\_CLR\_FOREGROUND}}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{clr}{The color}
-
-\docparam{flags}{Can be one of following:
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_CLR\_FOREGROUND}}{change color of text}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_CLR\_BACKGROUND}}{change background color}
-\end{twocollist}
-}
-

docs/latex/wx/htcontnr.tex

@@ -1,250 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlcontainercell.tex at 21/Mar/99 22:45:23
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlContainerCell}}\label{wxhtmlcontainercell}
-
-The wxHtmlContainerCell class is an implementation of a cell that may
-contain more cells in it. It is heavily used in the wxHTML layout algorithm.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlCell}{wxhtmlcell}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlcell.h>
-
-\wxheading{See Also}
-
-\helpref{Cells Overview}{cells}
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::wxHtmlContainerCell}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellwxhtmlcontainercell}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlContainerCell}{\param{wxHtmlContainerCell }{*parent}}
-
-Constructor. {\it parent} is pointer to parent container or NULL.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::GetAlignHor}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellgetalignhor}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetAlignHor}{\void}
-
-Returns container's horizontal alignment.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::GetAlignVer}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellgetalignver}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetAlignVer}{\void}
-
-Returns container's vertical alignment.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::GetBackgroundColour}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellgetbackgroundcolour}
-
-\func{wxColour}{GetBackgroundColour}{\void}
-
-Returns the background colour of the container or {\tt wxNullColour} if no background
-colour is set.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::GetFirstCell}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellgetfirstcell}
-
-\func{wxHtmlCell*}{GetFirstCell}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to the first cell in the list.
-You can then use wxHtmlCell's GetNext method to obtain pointer to the next
-cell in list.
-
-{\bf Note:} This shouldn't be used by the end user. If you need some way of
-finding particular cell in the list, try \helpref{Find}{wxhtmlcellfind} method
-instead.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::GetIndent}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellgetindent}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetIndent}{\param{int }{ind}}
-
-Returns the indentation. {\it ind} is one of the {\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_*} constants.
-
-{\bf Note:} You must call \helpref{GetIndentUnits}{wxhtmlcontainercellgetindentunits} 
-with same {\it ind} parameter in order to correctly interpret the returned integer value.
-It is NOT always in pixels!
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::GetIndentUnits}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellgetindentunits}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetIndentUnits}{\param{int }{ind}}
-
-Returns the units of indentation for {\it ind} where {\it ind} is one
-of the {\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_*} constants.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::InsertCell}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellinsertcell}
-
-\func{void}{InsertCell}{\param{wxHtmlCell }{*cell}}
-
-Inserts new cell into the container.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetAlign}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetalign}
-
-\func{void}{SetAlign}{\param{const wxHtmlTag\& }{tag}}
-
-Sets the container's alignment (both horizontal and vertical) according to
-the values stored in {\it tag}. (Tags {\tt ALIGN} parameter is extracted.) In fact
-it is only a front-end to \helpref{SetAlignHor}{wxhtmlcontainercellsetalignhor} 
-and \helpref{SetAlignVer}{wxhtmlcontainercellsetalignver}.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetAlignHor}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetalignhor}
-
-\func{void}{SetAlignHor}{\param{int }{al}}
-
-Sets the container's {\it horizontal alignment}. During \helpref{Layout}{wxhtmlcelllayout} 
-each line is aligned according to {\it al} value.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{al}{new horizontal alignment. May be one of these values:
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_LEFT}}{lines are left-aligned (default)}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_JUSTIFY}}{lines are justified}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_CENTER}}{lines are centered}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_RIGHT}}{lines are right-aligned}
-\end{twocollist}
-}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetAlignVer}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetalignver}
-
-\func{void}{SetAlignVer}{\param{int }{al}}
-
-Sets the container's {\it vertical alignment}. This is per-line alignment!
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{al}{new vertical alignment. May be one of these values:
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_BOTTOM}}{cells are over the line (default)}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_CENTER}}{cells are centered on line}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_TOP}}{cells are under the line}
-\end{twocollist}
-
-\helponly{\image{}{alignv.bmp}}
-}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetBackgroundColour}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetbackgroundcolour}
-
-\func{void}{SetBackgroundColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{clr}}
-
-Sets the background colour for this container.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetBorder}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetborder}
-
-\func{void}{SetBorder}{\param{const wxColour\& }{clr1}, \param{const wxColour\& }{clr2}}
-
-Sets the border (frame) colours. A border is a rectangle around the container.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{clr1}{Colour of top and left lines}
-
-\docparam{clr2}{Colour of bottom and right lines}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetIndent}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetindent}
-
-\func{void}{SetIndent}{\param{int }{i}, \param{int }{what}, \param{int }{units = wxHTML\_UNITS\_PIXELS}}
-
-Sets the indentation (free space between borders of container and subcells).
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{i}{Indentation value.}
-
-\docparam{what}{Determines which of the four borders we're setting. It is OR
-combination of following constants:
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_TOP}}{top border}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_BOTTOM}}{bottom}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_LEFT}}{left}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_RIGHT}}{right}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_HORIZONTAL}}{left and right}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_VERTICAL}}{top and bottom}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_INDENT\_ALL}}{all 4 borders}
-\end{twocollist}
-
-\helponly{\image{}{indent.bmp}}
-}
-
-\docparam{units}{Units of {\it i}. This parameter affects interpretation of {\it} value.
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_UNITS\_PIXELS}}{{\it i} is number of pixels}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_UNITS\_PERCENT}}{{\it i} is interpreted as percents of width
-of parent container}
-\end{twocollist}
-}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetMinHeight}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetminheight}
-
-\func{void}{SetMinHeight}{\param{int }{h}, \param{int }{align = wxHTML\_ALIGN\_TOP}}
-
-Sets minimal height of the container.
-
-When container's \helpref{Layout}{wxhtmlcelllayout} is called, m\_Height
-is set depending on layout of subcells to the height of area covered
-by layed-out subcells. Calling this method guarantees you that the height
-of container is never smaller than {\it h} - even if the subcells cover
-much smaller area.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{h}{The minimal height.}
-
-\docparam{align}{If height of the container is lower than the minimum height, empty space must be inserted
-somewhere in order to ensure minimal height. This parameter is one of {\bf wxHTML\_ALIGN\_TOP,
-wxHTML\_ALIGN\_BOTTOM, wxHTML\_ALIGN\_CENTER}. It refers to the {\it contents}, not to the
-empty place.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetWidthFloat}\label{wxhtmlcontainercellsetwidthfloat}
-
-\func{void}{SetWidthFloat}{\param{int }{w}, \param{int }{units}}
-
-\func{void}{SetWidthFloat}{\param{const wxHtmlTag\& }{tag}, \param{double }{pixel\_scale = 1.0}}
-
-Sets floating width adjustment.
-
-The normal behaviour of container is that its width is the same as the width of
-parent container (and thus you can have only one sub-container per line).
-You can change this by setting FWA.
-
-{\it pixel\_scale} is number of real pixels that equals to 1 HTML pixel.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{w}{Width of the container. If the value is negative it means
-complement to full width of parent container (e.g.
-{\tt SetWidthFloat(-50, wxHTML\_UNITS\_PIXELS)} sets the width
-of container to parent's width minus 50 pixels. This is useful when
-creating tables - you can call SetWidthFloat(50) and SetWidthFloat(-50))}
-
-\docparam{units}{Units of {\it w} This parameter affects the interpretation of {\it} value.
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_UNITS\_PIXELS}}{{\it w} is number of pixels}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_UNITS\_PERCENT}}{{\it w} is interpreted as percents of width
-of parent container}
-\end{twocollist}
-}
-
-\docparam{tag}{In the second version of method, {\it w} and {\it units}
-info is extracted from tag's {\tt WIDTH} parameter.}
-
-\pythonnote{The second form of this method is named
-SetWidthFloatFromTag in wxPython.}
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

docs/latex/wx/htdcrend.tex

@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmprint.h at 17/Oct/99 12:48:02
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlDCRenderer}}\label{wxhtmldcrenderer}
-
-This class can render HTML document into a specified area of a DC. You can use it
-in your own printing code, although use of \helpref{wxHtmlEasyPrinting}{wxhtmleasyprinting} 
-or \helpref{wxHtmlPrintout}{wxhtmlprintout} is strongly recommended.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmprint.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::wxHtmlDCRenderer}\label{wxhtmldcrendererwxhtmldcrenderer}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlDCRenderer}{\void}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::SetDC}\label{wxhtmldcrenderersetdc}
-
-\func{void}{SetDC}{\param{wxDC* }{dc}, \param{double }{pixel\_scale = 1.0}}
-
-Assign DC instance to the renderer.
-
-{\it pixel\_scale} can be used when rendering to high-resolution DCs (e.g. printer) to adjust size of pixel metrics.
-(Many dimensions in HTML are given in pixels -- e.g. image sizes. 300x300 image would be only one
-inch wide on typical printer. With pixel\_scale = 3.0 it would be 3 inches.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::SetFonts}\label{wxhtmldcrenderersetfonts}
-
-\func{void}{SetFonts}{\param{wxString }{normal\_face}, \param{wxString }{fixed\_face}, \param{const int }{*sizes = NULL}}
-
-Sets fonts. See \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::SetFonts}{wxhtmlwindowsetfonts} for
-detailed description.
-
-See also \helpref{SetSize}{wxhtmldcrenderersetsize}.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::SetSize}\label{wxhtmldcrenderersetsize}
-
-\func{void}{SetSize}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}}
-
-Set size of output rectangle, in pixels. Note that you {\bf can't} change
-width of the rectangle between calls to \helpref{Render}{wxhtmldcrendererrender}!
-(You can freely change height.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::SetHtmlText}\label{wxhtmldcrenderersethtmltext}
-
-\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = true}}
-
-Assign text to the renderer. \helpref{Render}{wxhtmldcrendererrender} then draws 
-the text onto DC.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{html}{HTML text. This is {\it not} a filename.}
-
-\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
-file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
-
-\docparam{isdir}{false if basepath is filename, true if it is directory name
-(see \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} for detailed explanation)}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::Render}\label{wxhtmldcrendererrender}
-
-\func{int}{Render}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{int }{from = 0}, \param{int }{dont\_render = false}}
-
-Renders HTML text to the DC.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{x,y}{ position of upper-left corner of printing rectangle (see \helpref{SetSize}{wxhtmldcrenderersetsize})}
-
-\docparam{from}{y-coordinate of the very first visible cell}
-
-\docparam{dont\_render}{if true then this method only returns y coordinate of the next page
-and does not output anything}
-
-Returned value is y coordinate of first cell than didn't fit onto page.
-Use this value as {\it from} in next call to Render in order to print multipages
-document.
-
-\wxheading{Caution!}
-
-The Following three methods {\bf must} always be called before any call to Render (preferably
-in this order):
-
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
-\item \helpref{SetDC}{wxhtmldcrenderersetdc}
-\item \helpref{SetSize}{wxhtmldcrenderersetsize}
-\item \helpref{SetHtmlText}{wxhtmldcrenderersethtmltext}
-\end{itemize}
-
-{\bf Render() changes the DC's user scale and does NOT restore it.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::GetTotalHeight}\label{wxhtmldcrenderergettotalheight}
-
-\func{int}{GetTotalHeight}{\void}
-
-Returns the height of the HTML text. This is important if area height (see \helpref{SetSize}{wxhtmldcrenderersetsize})
-is smaller that total height and thus the page cannot fit into it. In that case you're supposed to
-call \helpref{Render}{wxhtmldcrendererrender} as long as its return value is smaller than GetTotalHeight's.
-

docs/latex/wx/hteasypr.tex

@@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmprint.h at 17/Oct/99 12:48:02
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlEasyPrinting}}\label{wxhtmleasyprinting}
-
-This class provides very simple interface to printing 
-architecture. It allows you to print HTML documents using
-only a few commands. 
-
-\wxheading{Note}
-
-Do not create this class on the stack only. You should create an instance on app 
-startup and use this instance for all printing operations. The reason is that
-this class stores various settings in it.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmprint.h>
-
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::wxHtmlEasyPrinting}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingwxhtmleasyprinting}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlEasyPrinting}{\param{const wxString\& }{name = "Printing"}, \param{wxWindow* }{parentWindow = NULL}}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{name}{Name of the printing object. Used by preview frames and setup dialogs.}
-
-\docparam{parentWindow}{pointer to the window that will own the preview frame and setup dialogs. May be NULL.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PreviewFile}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingpreviewfile}
-
-\func{bool}{PreviewFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmlfile}}
-
-Preview HTML file. 
-
-Returns false in case of error -- call
-\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
-information about the kind of the error.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PreviewText}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingpreviewtext}
-
-\func{bool}{PreviewText}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmltext}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Preview HTML text (not file!). 
-
-Returns false in case of error -- call
-\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
-information about the kind of the error.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{htmltext}{HTML text.}
-
-\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
-file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PrintFile}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingprintfile}
-
-\func{bool}{PrintFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmlfile}}
-
-Print HTML file.
-
-Returns false in case of error -- call
-\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
-information about the kind of the error.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PrintText}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingprinttext}
-
-\func{bool}{PrintText}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmltext}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Print HTML text (not file!). 
-
-Returns false in case of error -- call
-\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
-information about the kind of the error.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{htmltext}{HTML text.}
-
-\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
-file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PrinterSetup}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingprintersetup}
-
-\func{void}{PrinterSetup}{\void}
-
-Display printer setup dialog and allows the user to modify settings. 
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PageSetup}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingpagesetup}
-
-\func{void}{PageSetup}{\void}
-
-Display page setup dialog and allows the user to modify settings. 
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::SetFonts}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingsetfonts}
-
-\func{void}{SetFonts}{\param{wxString }{normal\_face}, \param{wxString }{fixed\_face}, \param{const int }{*sizes = NULL}}
-
-Sets fonts. See \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::SetFonts}{wxhtmlwindowsetfonts} for
-detailed description.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::SetHeader}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingsetheader}
-
-\func{void}{SetHeader}{\param{const wxString\& }{header}, \param{int }{pg = wxPAGE\_ALL}}
-
-Set page header.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{header}{HTML text to be used as header. You can use macros in it:
-
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
-\item @PAGENUM@ is replaced by page number
-\item @PAGESCNT@ is replaced by total number of pages
-\end{itemize}
-}
-
-\docparam{pg}{one of wxPAGE\_ODD, wxPAGE\_EVEN and wxPAGE\_ALL constants.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::SetFooter}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingsetfooter}
-
-\func{void}{SetFooter}{\param{const wxString\& }{footer}, \param{int }{pg = wxPAGE\_ALL}}
-
-Set page footer.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{footer}{HTML text to be used as footer. You can use macros in it:
-
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
-\item @PAGENUM@ is replaced by page number
-\item @PAGESCNT@ is replaced by total number of pages
-\end{itemize}
-}
-
-\docparam{pg}{one of wxPAGE\_ODD, wxPAGE\_EVEN and wxPAGE\_ALL constants.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::GetPrintData}\label{wxhtmleasyprintinggetprintdata}
-
-\func{wxPrintData*}{GetPrintData}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to \helpref{wxPrintData}{wxprintdata} instance used by this class. You can
-set its parameters (via SetXXXX methods).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::GetPageSetupData}\label{wxhtmleasyprintinggetpagesetupdata}
-
-\func{wxPageSetupDialogData*}{GetPageSetupData}{\void}
-
-Returns a pointer to \helpref{wxPageSetupDialogData}{wxpagesetupdialogdata} instance used by 
-this class. You can set its parameters (via SetXXXX methods).
-

docs/latex/wx/htfilter.tex

@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlfilter.tex at 29/Mar/99 18:35:09
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlFilter}}\label{wxhtmlfilter}
-
-This class is an input filter for \helpref{wxHtmlWindow}{wxhtmlwindow}.
-It allows you to read and display files of different file formats.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlfilt.h>
-
-
-\wxheading{See Also}
-
-\helpref{Overview}{filters}
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlFilter::wxHtmlFilter}\label{wxhtmlfilterwxhtmlfilter}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlFilter}{\void}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlFilter::CanRead}\label{wxhtmlfiltercanread}
-
-\func{bool}{CanRead}{\param{const wxFSFile\& }{file}}
-
-Returns true if this filter is capable of reading file {\it file}.
-
-Example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-bool MyFilter::CanRead(const wxFSFile& file)
-{
-    return (file.GetMimeType() == "application/x-ugh");
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlFilter::ReadFile}\label{wxhtmlfilterreadfile}
-
-\func{wxString}{ReadFile}{\param{const wxFSFile\& }{file}}
-
-Reads the file and returns string with HTML document.
-
-Example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-wxString MyImgFilter::ReadFile(const wxFSFile& file)
-{
-    return "<html><body><img src=\"" +
-           file.GetLocation() +
-	   "\"></body></html>";
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-

docs/latex/wx/hthelpct.tex

@@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlhelp.h at 02/May/99 19:58:53
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlHelpController}}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontroller}
-
-{\bf WARNING!} Although this class has an API compatible with other wxWindows
-help controllers as documented by \helpref{wxHelpController}{wxhelpcontroller}, it
-is recommended that you use the enhanced capabilities of wxHtmlHelpController's API.
-
-This help controller provides an easy way of displaying HTML help in your
-application (see {\it test} sample). The help system is based on {\bf books} 
-(see \helpref{AddBook}{wxhtmlhelpcontrolleraddbook}). A book is a logical
-section of documentation (for example "User's Guide" or "Programmer's Guide" or
-"C++ Reference" or "wxWindows Reference"). The help controller can handle as
-many books as you want.
-
-wxHTML uses Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop project files (.hhp, .hhk, .hhc) as its
-native format. The file format is described \helpref{here}{helpformat}.
-Have a look at docs/html/ directory where sample project files are stored.
-
-You can use Tex2RTF to produce these files when generating HTML, if you set {\bf htmlWorkshopFiles} to {\bf true} in
-your tex2rtf.ini file.
-
-\wxheading{Note}
-
-It is strongly recommended to use preprocessed {\bf .hhp.cached} version of
-projects. It can be either created on-the-fly (see 
-\helpref{SetTempDir}{wxhtmlhelpcontrollersettempdir}) or you can use 
-{\bf hhp2cached} utility from {\it utils/hhp2cached} to create it and
-distribute the cached version together with helpfiles. See {\it samples/html/help} 
-sample for demonstration of its use.
-
-\wxheading{See also}
-
-\helpref{Information about wxBestHelpController}{wxhelpcontroller}
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-wxHelpControllerBase
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/helpctrl.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::wxHtmlHelpController}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerwxhtmlhelpcontroller}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlHelpController}{\param{int }{style = wxHF\_DEFAULT\_STYLE}}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-{\it style} is combination of these flags:
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_TOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_FLAT\_TOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar with flat buttons (aka coolbar).}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_CONTENTS}}{Help frame has contents panel.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_INDEX}}{Help frame has index panel.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_SEARCH}}{Help frame has search panel.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_BOOKMARKS}}{Help frame has bookmarks controls.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_OPEN\_FILES}}{Allow user to open arbitrary HTML document.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_PRINT}}{Toolbar contains "print" button.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_MERGE\_BOOKS}}{Contents pane does not show
-book nodes. All books are merged together and appear as single book to the
-user.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_ICONS\_BOOK}}{All nodes in contents pane
-have a book icon. This is how Microsoft's HTML help viewer behaves.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_ICONS\_FOLDER}}{Book nodes in contents pane have
-a book icon, book's sections have a folder icon. This is the default.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_ICONS\_BOOK\_CHAPTER}}{Both book nodes and
-nodes of top-level sections of a book (i.e. chapters) have a book icon,
-all other sections (sections, subsections, ...) have a folder icon.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_DEFAULT\_STYLE}}{{\tt wxHF\_TOOLBAR | wxHF\_CONTENTS
-| wxHF\_INDEX | wxHF\_SEARCH | wxHF\_BOOKMARKS | wxHF\_PRINT}}
-\end{twocollist}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::AddBook}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrolleraddbook}
-
-\func{bool}{AddBook}{\param{const wxFileName\& }{book\_file}, \param{bool }{show\_wait\_msg}}
-
-\func{bool}{AddBook}{\param{const wxString\& }{book\_url}, \param{bool }{show\_wait\_msg}}
-
-Adds book (\helpref{.hhp file}{helpformat} - HTML Help Workshop project file) into the list of loaded books.
-This must be called at least once before displaying  any help.
-
-{\it book\_file} or {\it book\_url}  may be either .hhp file or ZIP archive
-that contains arbitrary number of .hhp files in 
-top-level directory. This ZIP archive must have .zip or .htb extension
-(the latter stands for "HTML book"). In other words,
-{\tt AddBook(wxFileName("help.zip"))}
-is possible and, in fact, recommended way.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{show\_wait\_msg}{If true then a decoration-less window with progress message is displayed.}
-\docparam{book\_file}{Help book filename. It is recommended to use this prototype
-instead of the one taking URL, because it is less error-prone.}
-\docparam{book\_url}{Help book URL (note that syntax of filename and URL is 
-different on most platforms)}
-
-\wxheading{Note}
-
-Don't forget to install wxFileSystem ZIP handler with
-{\tt wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxZipFSHandler);} before calling this method
-on a .zip or .htb file!
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::CreateHelpFrame}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollercreatehelpframe}
-
-\func{virtual wxHtmlHelpFrame*}{CreateHelpFrame}{\param{wxHtmlHelpData * }{data}}
-
-This protected virtual method may be overridden so that the controller
-uses slightly different frame. See {\it samples/html/helpview} sample for
-an example.
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::Display}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerdisplay}
-
-\func{void}{Display}{\param{const wxString\& }{x}}
-
-Displays page {\it x}. This is THE important function - it is used to display
-the help in application.
-
-You can specify the page in many ways:
-
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
-\item as direct filename of HTML document
-\item as chapter name (from contents) or as a book name
-\item as some word from index
-\item even as any word (will be searched)
-\end{itemize}
-
-Looking for the page runs in these steps:
-
-\begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
-\item try to locate file named x (if x is for example "doc/howto.htm")
-\item try to open starting page of book named x
-\item try to find x in contents (if x is for example "How To ...")
-\item try to find x in index (if x is for example "How To ...")
-\item switch to Search panel and start searching
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\func{void}{Display}{\param{const int }{id}}
-
-This alternative form is used to search help contents by numeric IDs.
-
-\pythonnote{The second form of this method is named DisplayId in
-wxPython.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::DisplayContents}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerdisplaycontents}
-
-\func{void}{DisplayContents}{\void}
-
-Displays help window and focuses contents panel.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::DisplayIndex}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerdisplayindex}
-
-\func{void}{DisplayIndex}{\void}
-
-Displays help window and focuses index panel.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::KeywordSearch}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerkeywordsearch}
-
-\func{bool}{KeywordSearch}{\param{const wxString\& }{keyword}}
-
-Displays help window, focuses search panel and starts searching.
-Returns true if the keyword was found.
-
-{\bf Important:} KeywordSearch searches only pages listed in .hhc file(s).
-You should list all pages in the contents file.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::ReadCustomization}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerreadcustomization}
-
-\func{void}{ReadCustomization}{\param{wxConfigBase* }{cfg}, \param{wxString }{path = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Reads the controller's setting (position of window, etc.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::SetTempDir}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollersettempdir}
-
-\func{void}{SetTempDir}{\param{const wxString\& }{path}}
-
-Sets the path for storing temporary files - cached binary versions of index and contents files. These binary
-forms are much faster to read. Default value is empty string (empty string means
-that no cached data are stored). Note that these files are {\it not} 
-deleted when program exits.
-
-Once created these cached files will be used in all subsequent executions 
-of your application. If cached files become older than corresponding .hhp
-file (e.g. if you regenerate documentation) it will be refreshed.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::SetTitleFormat}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollersettitleformat}
-
-\func{void}{SetTitleFormat}{\param{const wxString\& }{format}}
-
-Sets format of title of the frame. Must contain exactly one "\%s"
-(for title of displayed HTML page).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::UseConfig}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrolleruseconfig}
-
-\func{void}{UseConfig}{\param{wxConfigBase* }{config}, \param{const wxString\& }{rootpath = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Associates {\it config} object with the controller.
-
-If there is associated config object, wxHtmlHelpController automatically
-reads and writes settings (including wxHtmlWindow's settings) when needed.
-
-The only thing you must do is create wxConfig object and call UseConfig.
-
-If you do not use {\it UseConfig}, wxHtmlHelpController will use 
-default wxConfig object if available (for details see 
-\helpref{wxConfigBase::Get}{wxconfigbaseget} and 
-\helpref{wxConfigBase::Set}{wxconfigbaseset}).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::WriteCustomization}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerwritecustomization}
-
-\func{void}{WriteCustomization}{\param{wxConfigBase* }{cfg}, \param{wxString }{path = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Stores controllers setting (position of window etc.)
-

docs/latex/wx/hthlpdat.tex

@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% helpdata.h at 24/Oct/99 18:03:10
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlHelpData}}\label{wxhtmlhelpdata}
-
-This class is used by \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController}{wxhtmlhelpcontroller} 
-and \helpref{wxHtmlHelpFrame}{wxhtmlhelpframe} to access HTML help items.
-It is internal class and should not be used directly - except for the case 
-you're writing your own HTML help controller.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/helpdata.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::wxHtmlHelpData}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatawxhtmlhelpdata}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlHelpData}{\void}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::AddBook}\label{wxhtmlhelpdataaddbook}
-
-\func{bool}{AddBook}{\param{const wxString\& }{book\_url}}
-
-Adds new book. {\it book} is URL (not filename!) of HTML help project (hhp)
-or ZIP file that contains arbitrary number of .hhp projects (this zip
-file can have either .zip or .htb extension, htb stands for "html book").
-Returns success.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::FindPageById}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatafindpagebyid}
-
-\func{wxString}{FindPageById}{\param{int }{id}}
-
-Returns page's URL based on integer ID stored in project.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::FindPageByName}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatafindpagebyname}
-
-\func{wxString}{FindPageByName}{\param{const wxString\& }{page}}
-
-Returns page's URL based on its (file)name.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::GetBookRecArray}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatagetbookrecarray}
-
-\func{const wxHtmlBookRecArray\&}{GetBookRecArray}{\void}
-
-Returns array with help books info.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::GetContents}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatagetcontents}
-
-\func{wxHtmlContentsItem*}{GetContents}{\void}
-
-Returns contents lists pointer.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::GetContentsCnt}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatagetcontentscnt}
-
-\func{int}{GetContentsCnt}{\void}
-
-Returns size of contents list.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::GetIndex}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatagetindex}
-
-\func{wxHtmlContentsItem*}{GetIndex}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to index items list.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::GetIndexCnt}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatagetindexcnt}
-
-\func{int}{GetIndexCnt}{\void}
-
-Returns size of index list.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpData::SetTempDir}\label{wxhtmlhelpdatasettempdir}
-
-\func{void}{SetTempDir}{\param{const wxString\& }{path}}
-
-Sets temporary directory where binary cached versions of MS HTML Workshop
-files will be stored. (This is turned off by default and you can enable
-this feature by setting non-empty temp dir.)
-

docs/latex/wx/hthlpfrm.tex

@@ -1,170 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% helpfrm.h at 24/Oct/99 18:03:10
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlHelpFrame}}\label{wxhtmlhelpframe}
-
-This class is used by \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController}{wxhtmlhelpcontroller} 
-to display help.
-It is an internal class and should not be used directly - except for the case
-when you're writing your own HTML help controller.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxFrame}{wxframe}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/helpfrm.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::wxHtmlHelpFrame}\label{wxhtmlhelpframewxhtmlhelpframe}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlHelpFrame}{\param{wxHtmlHelpData* }{data = NULL}}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlHelpFrame}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{int }{wxWindowID}, \param{const wxString\& }{title = wxEmptyString}, \param{int }{style = wxHF\_DEFAULT\_STYLE}, \param{wxHtmlHelpData* }{data = NULL}}
-
-Constructor.
-
-{\it style} is combination of these flags:
-
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_TOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_FLAT\_TOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar with flat buttons (aka coolbar).}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_CONTENTS}}{Help frame has contents panel.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_INDEX}}{Help frame has index panel.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_SEARCH}}{Help frame has search panel.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_BOOKMARKS}}{Help frame has bookmarks controls.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_OPEN\_FILES}}{Allow user to open arbitrary HTML document.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_PRINT}}{Toolbar contains "print" button.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_MERGE\_BOOKS}}{Contents pane does not show
-book nodes. All books are merged together and appear as single book to the
-user.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_ICONS\_BOOK}}{All nodes in contents pane
-have a book icon. This is how Microsoft's HTML help viewer behaves.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_ICONS\_FOLDER}}{Book nodes in contents pane have
-a book icon, book's sections have a folder icon. This is the default.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_ICONS\_BOOK\_CHAPTER}}{Both book nodes and
-nodes of top-level sections of a book (i.e. chapters) have a book icon,
-all other sections (sections, subsections, ...) have a folder icon.}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_DEFAULT\_STYLE}}{{\tt wxHF\_TOOLBAR | wxHF\_CONTENTS
-| wxHF\_INDEX | wxHF\_SEARCH | wxHF\_BOOKMARKS | wxHF\_PRINT}}
-\end{twocollist}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::Create}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreate}
-
-\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id}, \param{const wxString\& }{title = wxEmptyString}, \param{int }{style = wxHF\_DEFAULT\_STYLE}}
-
-Creates the frame. See \helpref{the constructor}{wxhtmlhelpframewxhtmlhelpframe}
-for parameters description.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateContents}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreatecontents}
-
-\func{void}{CreateContents}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
-
-Creates contents panel. (May take some time.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateIndex}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreateindex}
-
-\func{void}{CreateIndex}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
-
-Creates index panel. (May take some time.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateSearch}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreatesearch}
-
-\func{void}{CreateSearch}{\void}
-
-Creates search panel.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::Display}\label{wxhtmlhelpframedisplay}
-
-\func{bool}{Display}{\param{const wxString\& }{x}}
-
-\func{bool}{Display}{\param{const int }{id}}
-
-Displays page x. If not found it will give the user the choice of
-searching books.
-Looking for the page runs in these steps:
-
-\begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
-\item try to locate file named x (if x is for example "doc/howto.htm")
-\item try to open starting page of book x
-\item try to find x in contents (if x is for example "How To ...")
-\item try to find x in index (if x is for example "How To ...")
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The second form takes numeric ID as the parameter.
-(uses extension to MS format, <param name="ID" value=id>)
-
-\pythonnote{The second form of this method is named DisplayId in
-wxPython.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::DisplayContents}\label{wxhtmlhelpframedisplaycontents}
-
-\func{bool}{DisplayContents}{\void}
-
-Displays contents panel.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::DisplayIndex}\label{wxhtmlhelpframedisplayindex}
-
-\func{bool}{DisplayIndex}{\void}
-
-Displays index panel.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::GetData}\label{wxhtmlhelpframegetdata}
-
-\func{wxHtmlHelpData*}{GetData}{\void}
-
-Return wxHtmlHelpData object.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::KeywordSearch}\label{wxhtmlhelpframekeywordsearch}
-
-\func{bool}{KeywordSearch}{\param{const wxString\& }{keyword}}
-
-Search for given keyword.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::ReadCustomization}\label{wxhtmlhelpframereadcustomization}
-
-\func{void}{ReadCustomization}{\param{wxConfigBase* }{cfg}, \param{const wxString\& }{path = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Reads user's settings for this frame (see \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController::ReadCustomization}{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerreadcustomization})
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::RefreshLists}\label{wxhtmlhelpframerefreshlists}
-
-\func{void}{RefreshLists}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
-
-Refresh all panels. This is necessary if a new book was added.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::SetTitleFormat}\label{wxhtmlhelpframesettitleformat}
-
-\func{void}{SetTitleFormat}{\param{const wxString\& }{format}}
-
-Sets the frame's title format. {\it format} must contain exactly one "\%s"
-(it will be replaced by the page title).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::UseConfig}\label{wxhtmlhelpframeuseconfig}
-
-\func{void}{UseConfig}{\param{wxConfigBase* }{config}, \param{const wxString\& }{rootpath = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Add books to search choice panel.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::WriteCustomization}\label{wxhtmlhelpframewritecustomization}
-
-\func{void}{WriteCustomization}{\param{wxConfigBase* }{cfg}, \param{const wxString\& }{path = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Saves user's settings for this frame (see \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController::WriteCustomization}{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerwritecustomization}).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::AddToolbarButtons}\label{wxhtmlhelpframeaddtoolbarbuttons}
-
-\func{virtual void}{AddToolbarButtons}{\param{wxToolBar *}{toolBar}, \param{int }{style}} 
-
-You may override this virtual method to add more buttons into help frame's
-toolbar. {\it toolBar} is a pointer to the toolbar and {\it style} is the style
-flag as passed to Create method.
-
-wxToolBar::Realize is called immediately after returning from this function.
-
-See {\it samples/html/helpview} for an example.
-

docs/latex/wx/htlnkinf.tex

@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-\section{\class{wxHtmlLinkInfo}}\label{wxhtmllinkinfo}
-
-This class stores all necessary information about hypertext
-links (as represented by {\tt <A>} tag in HTML documents). In 
-current implementation it stores URL and target frame name. 
-{\it Note that frames are not currently supported by wxHTML!}
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlcell.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlLinkInfo::wxHtmlLinkInfo}\label{wxhtmllinkinfowxhtmllinkinfo}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlLinkInfo}{\void}
-
-Default ctor.
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlLinkInfo}{\param{const wxString\& }{href}, \param{const wxString\& }{target = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Construct hypertext link from HREF (aka URL) and TARGET (name of target
-frame).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlLinkInfo::GetEvent}\label{wxhtmllinkinfogetevent}
-
-\func{const wxMouseEvent *}{GetEvent}{\void}
-
-Return pointer to event that generated OnLinkClicked event. Valid
-only within \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::OnLinkClicked}{wxhtmlwindowonlinkclicked},
-NULL otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlLinkInfo::GetHtmlCell}\label{wxhtmllinkinfogethtmlcell}
-
-\func{const wxHtmlCell *}{GetHtmlCell}{\void}
-
-Return pointer to the cell that was clicked. Valid
-only within \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::OnLinkClicked}{wxhtmlwindowonlinkclicked},
-NULL otherwise.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlLinkInfo::GetHref}\label{wxhtmllinkinfogethref}
-
-\func{wxString}{GetHref}{\void}
-
-Return {\it HREF} value of the {\tt <A>} tag.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlLinkInfo::GetTarget}\label{wxhtmllinkinfogettarget}
-
-\func{wxString}{GetTarget}{\void}
-
-Return {\it TARGET} value of the {\tt <A>} tag (this value
-is used to specify in which frame should be the page pointed
-by \helpref{Href}{wxhtmllinkinfogethref} opened).
-

docs/latex/wx/htmlcell.tex

@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-\subsection{Cells and Containers}\label{cells}
-
-This article describes mechanism used by 
-\helpref{wxHtmlWinParser}{wxhtmlwinparser} and 
-\helpref{wxHtmlWindow}{wxhtmlwindow} to parse and display HTML documents.
-
-\wxheading{Cells}
-
-You can divide any text (or HTML) into small fragments. Let's call these
-fragments {\bf cells}. Cell is for example one word, horizontal line, image
-or any other part of document. Each cell has width and height (except special
-"magic" cells with zero dimensions - e.g. colour changers or font changers).
-
-See \helpref{wxHtmlCell}{wxhtmlcell}.
-
-\wxheading{Containers}
-
-Container is kind of cell that may contain sub-cells. Its size depends
-on number and sizes of its sub-cells (and also depends on width of window). 
-
-See \helpref{wxHtmlContainerCell}{wxhtmlcontainercell}, 
-\helpref{wxHtmlCell::Layout}{wxhtmlcelllayout}.
-
-\begin{comment}
-% Bitmap is corrupt!
-This image shows you cells and containers:
-
-\helponly{\image{}{contbox.bmp}}
-\end{comment}
-\wxheading{Using Containers in Tag Handler}
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlWinParser}{wxhtmlwinparser} provides a user-friendly way
-of managing containers. It is based on the idea of opening and closing containers.
-
-Use \helpref{OpenContainer}{wxhtmlwinparseropencontainer} to open new
-a container {\it within an already opened container}. This new container is a 
-{\it sub-container} of the old one. (If you want to create a new container with
-the same depth level you can call {\tt CloseContainer(); OpenContainer();}.)
-
-Use \helpref{CloseContainer}{wxhtmlwinparserclosecontainer} to close the 
-container. This doesn't create a new container with same depth level but
-it returns "control" to the parent container.
-
-\begin{comment}
-% Bitmap corrupt!
-See explanation:
-
-\helponly{\image{}{cont.bmp}}
-\end{comment}
-It is clear there must be same number of calls to 
-OpenContainer as to CloseContainer...
-
-\wxheading{Example}
-
-This code creates a new paragraph (container at same depth level)
-with "Hello, world!":
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-m_WParser -> CloseContainer();
-c = m_WParser -> OpenContainer();
-
-m_WParser -> AddWord("Hello, ");
-m_WParser -> AddWord("world!");
-
-m_WParser -> CloseContainer();
-m_WParser -> OpenContainer();
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{comment}
-% Bitmap corrupt!
-and here is image of the situation:
-
-\helponly{\image{}{hello.bmp}}
-\end{comment}
-
-You can see that there was opened container before running the code. We closed
-it, created our own container, then closed our container and opened
-new container. The result was that we had {\it same depth level} after
-executing. This is general rule that should be followed by tag handlers:
-leave depth level of containers unmodified (in other words, number of
-OpenContainer and CloseContainer calls should be same within \helpref{HandleTag}{wxhtmltaghandlerhandletag}'s body).
-

docs/latex/wx/htmlfilt.tex

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-\subsection{Input Filters}\label{filters}
-
-The wxHTML library provides a mechanism for reading and displaying
-files of many different file formats. 
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlWindow::LoadPage}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage} can load not
-only HTML files but any known file. To make a file type known to wxHtmlWindow
-you must create a \helpref{wxHtmlFilter}{wxhtmlfilter} filter and
-register it using \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::AddFilter}{wxhtmlwindowaddfilter}.
-

docs/latex/wx/htmlhand.tex

@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-\subsection{Tag Handlers}\label{handlers}
-
-The wxHTML library provides architecture of pluggable {\it tag handlers}.
-Tag handler is class that understands particular HTML tag (or tags) and is
-able to interpret it.
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlWinParser}{wxhtmlwinparser} has static table of {\bf modules}.
-Each module contains one or more tag handlers. Each time a new wxHtmlWinParser
-object is constructed all modules are scanned and handlers are added
-to wxHtmlParser's list of available handlers (note: wxHtmlParser's list
-is non-static).
-
-\wxheading{How it works}
-
-Common tag handler's \helpref{HandleTag}{wxhtmltaghandlerhandletag} method
-works in four steps:
-
-\begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
-\item Save state of parent parser into local variables
-\item Change parser state according to tag's params
-\item Parse text between the tag and paired ending tag (if present)
-\item Restore original parser state
-\end{enumerate}
-
-See \helpref{wxHtmlWinParser}{wxhtmlwinparser} for methods for modifying
-parser's state. In general you can do things like opening/closing containers,
-changing colors, fonts etc.
-
-\wxheading{Providing own tag handlers}
-
-You should create new .cpp file and place following lines into it: 
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-#include <mod_templ.h>
-#include <forcelink.h>
-FORCE_LINK_ME(yourmodulefilenamewithoutcpp)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Then you must define handlers and one module.
-
-\wxheading{Tag handlers}
-
-The handler is derived from \helpref{wxHtmlWinTagHandler}{wxhtmlwintaghandler}
-(or directly from \helpref{wxHtmlTagHandler}{wxhtmltaghandler})
-
-You can use set of macros to define the handler (see src/html/m\_*.cpp files
-for details). Handler definition must start with {\bf TAG\_HANDLER\_BEGIN} macro
-and end with {\bf TAG\_HANDLER\_END} macro. I strongly recommend to have a look
-at {\it include/wxhtml/mod\_templ.h} file. Otherwise you won't understand
-the structure of macros. See macros reference:
-
-{\bf TAG\_HANDLER\_BEGIN}({\it name}, {\it tags})
-
-Starts handler definition. {\it name} is handler identifier (in fact
-part of class name), {\it tags} is string containing list of tags
-supported by this handler (in uppercase). This macro derives new class from
-wxHtmlWinTagHandler and implements it is 
-\helpref{GetSupportedTags}{wxhtmltaghandlergetsupportedtags} method.
-
-Example: TAG\_HANDLER\_BEGIN(FONTS, "B,I,U,T")
-
-{\bf TAG\_HANDLER\_VARS}
-
-This macro starts block of variables definitions. (Variables are identical
-to class attributes.) Example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(VARS_ONLY, "CRAZYTAG")
-    TAG_HANDLER_VARS
-        int my_int_var;
-	wxString something_else;
-TAG_HANDLER_END(VARS_ONLY)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This macro is used only in rare cases.
-
-{\bf TAG\_HANDLER\_CONSTR}({\it name})
-
-This macro supplies object constructor. {\it name} is same name as the one
-from TAG\_HANDLER\_BEGIN macro. Body of constructor follow after
-this macro (you must use { and } ). Example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(VARS2, "CRAZYTAG")
-    TAG_HANDLER_VARS
-        int my_int_var;
-    TAG_HANDLER_CONSTR(vars2)
-        { // !!!!!!
-	    my_int_var = 666;
-	} // !!!!!!
-TAG_HANDLER_END(VARS2)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Never used in wxHTML :-)
-
-{\bf TAG\_HANDLER\_PROC}({\it varib})
-
-This is very important macro. It defines \helpref{HandleTag}{wxhtmltaghandlerhandletag}
-method. {\it varib} is name of parameter passed to the method, usually
-{\it tag}. Body of method follows after this macro.
-Note than you must use { and } ! Example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(TITLE, "TITLE")
-    TAG_HANDLER_PROC(tag)
-        {
-	    printf("TITLE found...\n");
-	}
-TAG_HANDLER_END(TITLE)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-{\bf TAG\_HANDLER\_END}({\it name})
-
-Ends definition of tag handler {\it name}. 
-
-\wxheading{Tags Modules}
-
-You can use set of 3 macros TAGS\_MODULE\_BEGIN, TAGS\_MODULE\_ADD and 
-TAGS\_MODULE\_END to inherit new module from
-\helpref{wxHtmlTagsModule}{wxhtmltagsmodule} and to create instance of it.
-See macros reference:
-
-{\bf TAGS\_MODULE\_BEGIN}({\it modname})
-
-Begins module definition. {\it modname} is part of class name and must
-be unique.
-
-{\bf TAGS\_MODULE\_ADD}({\it name})
-
-Adds the handler to this module. {\it name} is the identifier from
-TAG\_HANDLER\_BEGIN.
-
-{\bf TAGS\_MODULE\_END}({\it modname})
-
-Ends the definition of module.
-
-{\bf Example:}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-TAGS_MODULE_BEGIN(Examples)
-    TAGS_MODULE_ADD(VARS_ONLY)
-    TAGS_MODULE_ADD(VARS2)
-    TAGS_MODULE_ADD(TITLE)
-TAGS_MODULE_END(Examples)
-\end{verbatim}
-

docs/latex/wx/htmlhlpf.tex

@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-\subsection{Help Files Format}\label{helpformat}
-
-wxHTML library uses a reduced version of MS HTML Workshop format.
-Tex2RTF can produce these files when generating HTML, if you set {\bf htmlWorkshopFiles} to {\bf true} in
-your tex2rtf.ini file.
-
-(See \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController}{wxhtmlhelpcontroller} for help controller description.)
-
-A {\bf book} consists of three files: header file, contents file and index file.
-You can make a regular zip archive of these files, plus the HTML and any image files,
-for wxHTML (or helpview) to read; and the .zip file can optionally be renamed to .htb.
-
-\wxheading{Header file (.hhp)}
-
-Header file must contain these lines (and may contain additional lines which are ignored) :
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Contents file=<filename.hhc>
-Index file=<filename.hhk>
-Title=<title of your book>
-Default topic=<default page to be displayed.htm>
-\end{verbatim}
-
-All filenames (including the Default topic) are relative to the 
-location of .hhp file.
-
-{\bf Localization note:} In addition, .hhp file may contain line
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-Charset=<rfc_charset>
-\end{verbatim}
-
-which specifies what charset (e.g. "iso8859\_1") was used in contents
-and index files. Please note that this line is incompatible with
-MS HTML Help Workshop and it would either silently remove it or complain
-with some error. See also 
-\helpref{Writing non-English applications}{nonenglishoverview}.
-
-\wxheading{Contents file (.hhc)}
-
-Contents file has HTML syntax and it can be parsed by regular HTML parser. It contains exactly one list
-({\tt <ul>}....{\tt </ul>} statement):
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-<ul>
-
-  <li> <object type="text/sitemap">
-           <param name="Name" value="@topic name@">
-           <param name="ID" value=@numeric_id@>
-           <param name="Local" value="@filename.htm@">
-       </object>
-  <li> <object type="text/sitemap">
-           <param name="Name" value="@topic name@">
-           <param name="ID" value=@numeric_id@>
-           <param name="Local" value="@filename.htm@">
-       </object>
-  ...    
-
-</ul>
-\end{verbatim}
-
-You can modify value attributes of param tags. {\it topic name} is name of chapter/topic as is displayed in
-contents, {\it filename.htm} is HTML page name (relative to .hhp file) and {\it numeric\_id} is optional 
-- it is used only when you use \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController::Display(int)}{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerdisplay}
-
-Items in the list may be nested - one {\tt <li>} statement may contain a {\tt <ul>} sub-statement:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-<ul>
-
-  <li> <object type="text/sitemap">
-           <param name="Name" value="Top node">
-           <param name="Local" value="top.htm">
-       </object>
-       <ul>
-         <li> <object type="text/sitemap">
-              <param name="Name" value="subnode in topnode">
-              <param name="Local" value="subnode1.htm">
-              </object>
-      ...
-       </ul>
-       
-  <li> <object type="text/sitemap">
-           <param name="Name" value="Another Top">
-           <param name="Local" value="top2.htm">
-       </object>
-  ...    
-
-</ul>
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\wxheading{Index file (.hhk)}
-
-Index files have same format as contents file except that ID params are ignored and sublists are {\bf not} 
-allowed.
-

docs/latex/wx/htmllbox.tex

@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% Name:        htmllbox.tex
-%% Purpose:     wxHtmlListBox documentation
-%% Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
-%% Modified by:
-%% Created:     01.06.03
-%% RCS-ID:      $Id$
-%% Copyright:   (c) 2003 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
-%% License:     wxWindows license
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlListBox}}\label{wxhtmllistbox}
-
-wxHtmlListBox is an implementation of \helpref{wxVListBox}{wxvlistbox} which
-shows HTML content in the listbox rows. This is still an abstract base class
-and you will need to derive your own class from it (see htlbox sample for the
-example) but you will only need to override a single 
-\helpref{OnGetItem()}{wxhtmllistboxongetitem} function.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxVListBox}{wxvlistbox}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/htmllbox.h>
-
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlListBox::wxHtmlListBox}\label{wxhtmllistboxwxhtmllistbox}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlListBox}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id = wxID\_ANY}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize}, \param{size\_t }{countItems = 0}, \param{long }{style = 0}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = wxVListBoxNameStr}}
-
-Normal constructor which calls \helpref{Create()}{wxhtmllistboxcreate}
-internally.
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlListBox}{\void}
-
-Default constructor, you must call \helpref{Create()}{wxhtmllistboxcreate}
-later.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlListBox::\destruct{wxHtmlListBox}}\label{wxhtmllistboxdtor}
-
-\func{}{\destruct{wxHtmlListBox}}{\void}
-
-Destructor cleans up whatever resources we use.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlListBox::Create}\label{wxhtmllistboxcreate}
-
-\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id = wxID\_ANY}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize}, \param{size\_t }{countItems = 0}, \param{long }{style = 0}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = wxVListBoxNameStr}}
-
-Creates the control and optionally sets the initial number of items in it
-(it may also be set or changed later with 
-\helpref{SetItemCount()}{wxvlistboxsetitemcount}).
-
-There are no special styles defined for wxHtmlListBox, in particular the
-wxListBox styles can not be used here.
-
-Returns {\tt true} on success or {\tt false} if the control couldn't be created
-
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlListBox::OnGetItem}\label{wxhtmllistboxongetitem}
-
-\constfunc{wxString}{OnGetItem}{\param{size\_t }{n}}
-
-This method must be implemented in the derived class and should return
-the body (i.e. without {\tt <html>} nor {\tt <body>} tags) of the HTML fragment
-for the given item.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlListBox::OnGetItemMarkup}\label{wxhtmllistboxongetitemmarkup}
-
-\constfunc{wxString}{OnGetItemMarkup}{\param{size\_t }{n}}
-
-This function may be overridden to decorate HTML returned by
-\helpref{OnGetItem()}{wxhtmllistboxongetitem}.
-

docs/latex/wx/htmlprn.tex

@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-\subsection{HTML Printing}\label{printing}
-
-The wxHTML library provides printing facilities with several levels of complexity. 
-
-The easiest way to print an HTML document is to use 
-\helpref{wxHtmlEasyPrinting class}{wxhtmleasyprinting}. It lets you print HTML documents with only one
-command and you don't have to worry about deriving from the wxPrintout class at all. It is only a simple wrapper around the 
-\helpref{wxHtmlPrintout}{wxhtmlprintout}, normal wxWindows printout class.
-
-And finally there is the low level class \helpref{wxHtmlDCRenderer}{wxhtmldcrenderer} which you can use to
-render HTML into a rectangular area on any DC. It supports rendering into multiple rectangles with the same
-width. (The most common use of this is placing one rectangle on each page or printing into two columns.)
-

docs/latex/wx/htmlstrt.tex

@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-\subsection{wxHTML quick start}\label{wxhtmlquickstart}
-
-\wxheading{Displaying HMTL}
-
-First of all, you must include <wx/wxhtml.h>.
-
-Class \helpref{wxHtmlWindow}{wxhtmlwindow} (derived from wxScrolledWindow)
-is used to display HTML documents.
-It has two important methods: \helpref{LoadPage}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage} 
-and \helpref{SetPage}{wxhtmlwindowsetpage}.
-LoadPage loads and displays HTML file while SetPage displays directly the
-passed {\bf string}. See the example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-    mywin -> LoadPage("test.htm");
-    mywin -> SetPage("<html><body>"
-                     "<h1>Error</h1>"
-		     "Some error occurred :-H)"
-		     "</body></hmtl>");
-\end{verbatim}
-
-I think the difference is quite clear.
-
-\wxheading{Displaying Help}
-
-See \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController}{wxhtmlhelpcontroller}.
-
-\wxheading{Setting up wxHtmlWindow}
-
-Because wxHtmlWindow is derived from wxScrolledWindow and not from
-wxFrame, it doesn't have visible frame. But the user usually want to see
-the title of HTML page displayed somewhere and frame's titlebar is 
-ideal place for it.
-
-wxHtmlWindow provides 2 methods in order to handle this: 
-\helpref{SetRelatedFrame}{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedframe} and 
-\helpref{SetRelatedStatusBar}{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedstatusbar}. 
-See the example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-    html = new wxHtmlWindow(this);
-    html -> SetRelatedFrame(this, "HTML : %%s");
-    html -> SetRelatedStatusBar(0);
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The first command associates html object with it is parent frame
-(this points to wxFrame object there) and sets format of title.
-Page title "Hello, world!" will be displayed as "HTML : Hello, world!"
-in this example.
-
-The second command sets which frame's status bar should be used to display
-browser's messages (such as "Loading..." or "Done" or hypertext links).
-
-\wxheading{Customizing wxHtmlWindow}
-
-You can customize wxHtmlWindow by setting font size, font face and
-borders (space between border of window and displayed HTML). Related functions:
-
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
-\item \helpref{SetFonts}{wxhtmlwindowsetfonts}
-\item \helpref{SetBorders}{wxhtmlwindowsetborders}
-\item \helpref{ReadCustomization}{wxhtmlwindowreadcustomization}
-\item \helpref{WriteCustomization}{wxhtmlwindowwritecustomization}
-\end{itemize}
-
-The last two functions are used to store user customization info wxConfig stuff
-(for example in the registry under Windows, or in a dotfile under Unix).
-

docs/latex/wx/htmltags.tex

@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-\subsection{Tags supported by wxHTML}\label{htmltagssupported}
-
-wxHTML is not full implementation of HTML standard. Instead, it supports most common tags so that it 
-is possible to display {\it simple} HTML documents with it. (For example it works fine with pages created
-in Netscape Composer or generated by tex2rtf).
-
-Following tables list all tags known to wxHTML, together with supported parameters.
-A tag has general form of {\tt <tagname param\_1 param\_2 ... param\_n>} where param\_i is
-either {\tt paramname="paramvalue"} or {\tt paramname=paramvalue} - these two are equivalent. Unless stated 
-otherwise, wxHTML is case-insensitive.
-
-\wxheading{Table of common parameter values}
-
-We will use these substitutions in tags descriptions:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-[alignment]     CENTER
-                LEFT
-                RIGHT
-                JUSTIFY
-
-[v_alignment]   TOP
-                BOTTOM
-                CENTER
-                
-[color]         HTML 4.0-compliant colour specification
-
-[fontsize]      -2
-                -1
-                +0
-                +1
-                +2
-                +3
-                +4
-                 1
-                 2
-                 3
-                 4
-                 5
-                 6
-                 7
-
-[pixels]        integer value that represents dimension in pixels
-
-[percent]       i% 
-                where i is integer
-
-[url]           an URL 
-
-[string]        text string
-
-[coords]        c(1),c(2),c(3),...,c(n)
-                where c(i) is integer
-
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\wxheading{List of supported tags}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-A               NAME=[string]
-                HREF=[url]
-                TARGET=[target window spec]
-ADDRESS
-AREA            SHAPE=POLY
-                SHAPE=CIRCLE
-                SHAPE=RECT
-                COORDS=[coords]
-                HREF=[url]
-B
-BIG
-BLOCKQUOTE
-BODY            TEXT=[color]
-                LINK=[color]
-                BGCOLOR=[color]
-BR              ALIGN=[alignment]
-CENTER
-CITE
-CODE
-DD
-DIV             ALIGN=[alignment]
-DL
-DT
-EM
-FONT            COLOR=[color]
-                SIZE=[fontsize]
-                FACE=[comma-separated list of facenames]
-HR              ALIGN=[alignment]
-                SIZE=[pixels]
-                WIDTH=[percent|pixels]
-                NOSHADE
-H1
-H2
-H3
-H4
-H5
-H6
-I
-IMG             SRC=[url]
-                WIDTH=[pixels]
-                HEIGHT=[pixels]
-                ALIGN=TEXTTOP
-                ALIGN=CENTER
-                ALIGN=ABSCENTER
-                ALIGN=BOTTOM
-                USEMAP=[url]
-KBD
-LI
-MAP             NAME=[string]
-META            HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type"
-                CONTENT=[string]
-OL
-P               ALIGN=[alignment]
-PRE
-SAMP
-SMALL
-STRIKE
-STRONG
-TABLE           ALIGN=[alignment]
-                WIDTH=[percent|pixels]
-                BORDER=[pixels]
-                VALIGN=[v_alignment]
-                BGCOLOR=[color]
-                CELLSPACING=[pixels]
-                CELLPADDING=[pixels]
-TD              ALIGN=[alignment]
-                VALIGN=[v_alignment]
-                BGCOLOR=[color]
-                WIDTH=[percent|pixels]
-                COLSPAN=[pixels]
-                ROWSPAN=[pixels]
-TH              ALIGN=[alignment]
-                VALIGN=[v_alignment]
-                BGCOLOR=[color]
-                WIDTH=[percent|pixels]
-                COLSPAN=[pixels]
-                ROWSPAN=[pixels]
-TITLE
-TR              ALIGN=[alignment]
-                VALIGN=[v_alignment]
-                BGCOLOR=[color]
-TT
-U
-UL
-
-\end{verbatim}
-

docs/latex/wx/htparser.tex

@@ -1,267 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlparser.tex at 14/Mar/99 20:13:37
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlParser}}\label{wxhtmlparser}
-
-This class handles the {\bf generic} parsing of HTML document: it scans
-the document and divide it into blocks of tags (where one block
-consists of beginning and ending tag and of text between these
-two tags).
-
-It is independent from wxHtmlWindow and can be used as stand-alone parser
-(Julian Smart's idea of speech-only HTML viewer or wget-like utility -
-see InetGet sample for example).
-
-It uses system of tag handlers to parse the HTML document. Tag handlers
-are not statically shared by all instances but are created for each
-wxHtmlParser instance. The reason is that the handler may contain
-document-specific temporary data used during parsing (e.g. complicated
-structures like tables).
-
-Typically the user calls only the \helpref{Parse}{wxhtmlparserparse} method.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-wxObject
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlpars.h>
-
-\wxheading{See also}
-
-\helpref{Cells Overview}{cells},
-\helpref{Tag Handlers Overview}{handlers},
-\helpref{wxHtmlTag}{wxhtmltag}
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::wxHtmlParser}\label{wxhtmlparserwxhtmlparser}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlParser}{\void}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::AddTag}\label{wxhtmlparseraddtag}
-
-\func{void}{AddTag}{\param{const wxHtmlTag\& }{tag}}
-
-This may (and may not) be overwritten in derived class.
-
-This method is called each time new tag is about to be added. 
-{\it tag} contains information about the tag. (See \helpref{wxHtmlTag}{wxhtmltag}
-for details.)
-
-Default (wxHtmlParser) behaviour is this:
-First it finds a handler capable of handling this tag and then it calls
-handler's HandleTag method.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::AddTagHandler}\label{wxhtmlparseraddtaghandler}
-
-\func{virtual void}{AddTagHandler}{\param{wxHtmlTagHandler }{*handler}}
-
-Adds handler to the internal list (\& hash table) of handlers. This
-method should not be called directly by user but rather by derived class'
-constructor.
-
-This adds the handler to this {\bf instance} of wxHtmlParser, not to
-all objects of this class! (Static front-end to AddTagHandler is provided
-by wxHtmlWinParser).
-
-All handlers are deleted on object deletion.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::AddText}\label{wxhtmlparseraddword}
-
-\func{virtual void}{AddWord}{\param{const char* }{txt}}
-
-Must be overwritten in derived class.
-
-This method is called by \helpref{DoParsing}{wxhtmlparserdoparsing}
-each time a part of text is parsed. {\it txt} is NOT only one word, it is
-substring of input. It is not formatted or preprocessed (so white spaces are
-unmodified).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::DoParsing}\label{wxhtmlparserdoparsing}
-
-\func{void}{DoParsing}{\param{int }{begin\_pos}, \param{int }{end\_pos}}
-
-\func{void}{DoParsing}{\void}
-
-Parses the m\_Source from begin\_pos to end\_pos-1.
-(in noparams version it parses whole m\_Source)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::DoneParser}\label{wxhtmlparserdoneparser}
-
-\func{virtual void}{DoneParser}{\void}
-
-This must be called after DoParsing().
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::GetFS}\label{wxhtmlparsergetfs}
-
-\constfunc{wxFileSystem*}{GetFS}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to the file system. Because each tag handler has
-reference to it is parent parser it can easily request the file by
-calling
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-wxFSFile *f = m_Parser -> GetFS() -> OpenFile("image.jpg");
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::GetProduct}\label{wxhtmlparsergetproduct}
-
-\func{virtual wxObject*}{GetProduct}{\void}
-
-Returns product of parsing. Returned value is result of parsing
-of the document. The type of this result depends on internal
-representation in derived parser (but it must be derived from wxObject!).
-
-See wxHtmlWinParser for details.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::GetSource}\label{wxhtmlparsergetsource}
-
-\func{wxString*}{GetSource}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to the source being parsed.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::InitParser}\label{wxhtmlparserinitparser}
-
-\func{virtual void}{InitParser}{\param{const wxString\& }{source}}
-
-Setups the parser for parsing the {\it source} string. (Should be overridden
-in derived class)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::OpenURL}\label{wxhtmlparseropenurl}
-
-\func{virtual wxFSFile*}{OpenURL}{\param{wxHtmlURLType }{type}, \param{const wxString\& }{url}}
-
-Opens given URL and returns {\tt wxFSFile} object that can be used to read data
-from it. This method may return NULL in one of two cases: either the URL doesn't
-point to any valid resource or the URL is blocked by overridden implementation
-of {\it OpenURL} in derived class.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{type}{Indicates type of the resource. Is one of
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_URL\_PAGE}}{Opening a HTML page.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_URL\_IMAGE}}{Opening an image.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_URL\_OTHER}}{Opening a resource that doesn't fall into
-any other category.}
-\end{twocollist}}
-
-\docparam{url}{URL being opened.}
-
-\wxheading{Notes}
-
-Always use this method in tag handlers instead of {\tt GetFS()->OpenFile()} 
-because it can block the URL and is thus more secure.
-
-Default behaviour is to call \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::OnOpeningURL}{wxhtmlwindowonopeningurl}
-of the associated wxHtmlWindow object (which may decide to block the URL or
-redirect it to another one),if there's any, and always open the URL if the 
-parser is not used with wxHtmlWindow.
-
-Returned {\tt wxFSFile} object is not guaranteed to point to {\it url}, it might
-have been redirected!
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::Parse}\label{wxhtmlparserparse}
-
-\func{wxObject*}{Parse}{\param{const wxString\& }{source}}
-
-Proceeds parsing of the document. This is end-user method. You can simply
-call it when you need to obtain parsed output (which is parser-specific)
-
-The method does these things:
-
-\begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
-\item calls \helpref{InitParser(source)}{wxhtmlparserinitparser}
-\item calls \helpref{DoParsing}{wxhtmlparserdoparsing}
-\item calls \helpref{GetProduct}{wxhtmlparsergetproduct}
-\item calls \helpref{DoneParser}{wxhtmlparserdoneparser}
-\item returns value returned by GetProduct
-\end{enumerate}
-
-You shouldn't use InitParser, DoParsing, GetProduct or DoneParser directly.
-
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::PushTagHandler}\label{wxhtmlparserpushtaghandler}
-
-\func{void}{PushTagHandler}{\param{wxHtmlTagHandler* }{handler}, \param{wxString }{tags}}
-
-Forces the handler to handle additional tags 
-(not returned by \helpref{GetSupportedTags}{wxhtmltaghandlergetsupportedtags}). 
-The handler should already be added to this parser.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{handler}{the handler}
-\docparam{tags}{List of tags (in same format as GetSupportedTags's return value). The parser
-will redirect these tags to {\it handler} (until call to \helpref{PopTagHandler}{wxhtmlparserpoptaghandler}). }
-
-\wxheading{Example}
-
-Imagine you want to parse following pseudo-html structure:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-<myitems>
-    <param name="one" value="1">
-    <param name="two" value="2">
-</myitems>
-
-<execute>
-    <param program="text.exe">
-</execute>
-\end{verbatim}
-
-It is obvious that you cannot use only one tag handler for <param> tag.
-Instead you must use context-sensitive handlers for <param> inside <myitems>
-and <param> inside <execute>.        
-
-This is the preferred solution:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(MYITEM, "MYITEMS")
-    TAG_HANDLER_PROC(tag)
-    {
-        // ...something...
-
-        m_Parser -> PushTagHandler(this, "PARAM");
-        ParseInner(tag);
-        m_Parser -> PopTagHandler();
-
-        // ...something...
-     }
-TAG_HANDLER_END(MYITEM)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::PopTagHandler}\label{wxhtmlparserpoptaghandler}
-
-\func{void}{PopTagHandler}{\void}
-
-Restores parser's state before last call to 
-\helpref{PushTagHandler}{wxhtmlparserpushtaghandler}.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::SetFS}\label{wxhtmlparsersetfs}
-
-\func{void}{SetFS}{\param{wxFileSystem }{*fs}}
-
-Sets the virtual file system that will be used to request additional
-files. (For example {\tt <IMG>} tag handler requests wxFSFile with the
-image data.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlParser::StopParsing}\label{wxhtmlparserstopparsing}
-
-\func{void}{StopParsing}{\void}
-
-Call this function to interrupt parsing from a tag handler. No more tags
-will be parsed afterward. This function may only be called from
-\helpref{wxHtmlParser::Parse}{wxhtmlparserparse} or any function called
-by it (i.e. from tag handlers).
-

docs/latex/wx/htprint.tex

@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmprint.h at 17/Oct/99 12:48:02
-%
-
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlPrintout}}\label{wxhtmlprintout}
-
-This class serves as printout class for HTML documents.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxPrintout}{wxprintout}
-
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmprint.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::wxHtmlPrintout}\label{wxhtmlprintoutwxhtmlprintout}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlPrintout}{\param{const wxString\& }{title = "Printout"}}
-
-Constructor. 
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetFonts}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsetfonts}
-
-\func{void}{SetFonts}{\param{wxString }{normal\_face}, \param{wxString }{fixed\_face}, \param{const int }{*sizes = NULL}}
-
-Sets fonts. See \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::SetFonts}{wxhtmlwindowsetfonts} for
-detailed description.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetFooter}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsetfooter}
-
-\func{void}{SetFooter}{\param{const wxString\& }{footer}, \param{int }{pg = wxPAGE\_ALL}}
-
-Sets page footer.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{footer}{HTML text to be used as footer. You can use macros in it:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item @PAGENUM@ is replaced by page number
-\item @PAGESCNT@ is replaced by total number of pages
-\end{itemize}
-}
-
-\docparam{pg}{one of wxPAGE\_ODD, wxPAGE\_EVEN and wxPAGE\_ALL constants.}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetHeader}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsetheader}
-
-\func{void}{SetHeader}{\param{const wxString\& }{header}, \param{int }{pg = wxPAGE\_ALL}}
-
-Sets page header.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{header}{HTML text to be used as header. You can use macros in it:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item @PAGENUM@ is replaced by page number
-\item @PAGESCNT@ is replaced by total number of pages
-\end{itemize}
-}
-
-\docparam{pg}{one of wxPAGE\_ODD, wxPAGE\_EVEN and wxPAGE\_ALL constants.}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetHtmlFile}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsethtmlfile}
-
-\func{void}{SetHtmlFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmlfile}}
-
-Prepare the class for printing this HTML {\bf file}. The file may be located on 
-any virtual file system or it may be normal file.
-
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetHtmlText}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsethtmltext}
-
-\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = true}}
-
-Prepare the class for printing this HTML text.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{html}{HTML text. (NOT file!)}
-
-\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
-file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
-
-\docparam{isdir}{false if basepath is filename, true if it is directory name
-(see \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} for detailed explanation)}
-
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetMargins}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsetmargins}
-
-\func{void}{SetMargins}{\param{float }{top = 25.2}, \param{float }{bottom = 25.2}, \param{float }{left = 25.2}, \param{float }{right = 25.2}, \param{float }{spaces = 5}}
-
-Sets margins in millimeters. Defaults to 1 inch for margins and 0.5cm for space
-between text and header and/or footer
-

docs/latex/wx/httag.tex

@@ -1,194 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmltag.tex at 14/Mar/99 20:13:37
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlTag}}\label{wxhtmltag}
-
-This class represents a single HTML tag. 
-It is used by \helpref{tag handlers}{handlers}.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-wxObject
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmltag.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::wxHtmlTag}\label{wxhtmltagwxhtmltag}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlTag}{\param{const wxString\& }{source}, \param{int }{pos}, \param{int }{end\_pos}, \param{wxHtmlTagsCache* }{cache}}
-
-Constructor. You will probably never have to construct a wxHtmlTag object
-yourself. Feel free to ignore the constructor parameters.
-Have a look at src/html/htmlpars.cpp if you're interested in creating it.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetAllParams}\label{wxhtmltaggetallparams}
-
-\constfunc{const wxString\&}{GetAllParams}{\void}
-
-Returns a string containing all parameters.
-
-Example : tag contains {\tt <FONT SIZE=+2 COLOR="\#000000">}. Call to
-tag.GetAllParams() would return {\tt SIZE=+2 COLOR="\#000000"}.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetBeginPos}\label{wxhtmltaggetbeginpos}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetBeginPos}{\void}
-
-Returns beginning position of the text {\it between} this tag and paired
-ending tag. 
-See explanation (returned position is marked with `|'):
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-bla bla bla <MYTAG> bla bla internal text</MYTAG> bla bla
-                   |
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetEndPos1}\label{wxhtmltaggetendpos1}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetEndPos1}{\void}
-
-Returns ending position of the text {\it between} this tag and paired
-ending tag.
-See explanation (returned position is marked with `|'):
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-bla bla bla <MYTAG> bla bla internal text</MYTAG> bla bla
-                                        |
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetEndPos2}\label{wxhtmltaggetendpos2}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetEndPos2}{\void}
-
-Returns ending position 2 of the text {\it between} this tag and paired
-ending tag.
-See explanation (returned position is marked with `|'):
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-bla bla bla <MYTAG> bla bla internal text</MYTAG> bla bla
-                                               |
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetName}\label{wxhtmltaggetname}
-
-\constfunc{wxString}{GetName}{\void}
-
-Returns tag's name. The name is always in uppercase and it doesn't contain
-'<' or '/' characters. (So the name of {\tt <FONT SIZE=+2>} tag is "FONT"
-and name of {\tt </table>} is "TABLE")
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetParam}\label{wxhtmltaggetparam}
-
-\constfunc{wxString}{GetParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{bool }{with\_commas = false}}
-
-Returns the value of the parameter. You should check whether the
-parameter exists or not (use \helpref{HasParam}{wxhtmltaghasparam}) first.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{par}{The parameter's name.}
-
-\docparam{with\_commas}{true if you want to get commas as well. See example.}
-
-\wxheading{Example}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-...
-/* you have wxHtmlTag variable tag which is equal to
-   HTML tag <FONT SIZE=+2 COLOR="#0000FF"> */
-dummy = tag.GetParam("SIZE");
-   // dummy == "+2"
-dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR");
-   // dummy == "#0000FF"
-dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR", true);
-   // dummy == "\"#0000FF\"" -- see the difference!!
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetParamAsColour}\label{wxhtmltaggetparamascolour}
-
-\constfunc{bool}{GetParamAsColour}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{wxColour *}{clr}}
-
-Interprets tag parameter {\it par} as colour specification and saves its value
-into wxColour variable pointed by {\it clr}.
-
-Returns true on success and false if {\it par} is not colour specification or
-if the tag has no such parameter.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetParamAsInt}\label{wxhtmltaggetparamasint}
-
-\constfunc{bool}{GetParamAsInt}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{int *}{value}}
-
-Interprets tag parameter {\it par} as an integer and saves its value
-into int variable pointed by {\it value}.
-
-Returns true on success and false if {\it par} is not an integer or
-if the tag has no such parameter.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::HasEnding}\label{wxhtmltaghasending}
-
-\constfunc{bool}{HasEnding}{\void}
-
-Returns true if this tag is paired with ending tag, false otherwise.
-
-See the example of HTML document:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-<html><body>
-Hello<p>
-How are you?
-<p align=center>This is centered...</p>
-Oops<br>Oooops!
-</body></html>
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In this example tags HTML and BODY have ending tags, first P and BR 
-doesn't have ending tag while the second P has. The third P tag (which
-is ending itself) of course doesn't have ending tag.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::HasParam}\label{wxhtmltaghasparam}
-
-\constfunc{bool}{HasParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}}
-
-Returns true if the tag has a parameter of the given name. 
-Example : {\tt <FONT SIZE=+2 COLOR="\#FF00FF">} has two parameters named
-"SIZE" and "COLOR".
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{par}{the parameter you're looking for.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::IsEnding}\label{wxhtmltagisending}
-
-\constfunc{bool}{IsEnding}{\void}
-
-Returns true if this tag is ending one.
-({\tt </FONT>} is ending tag, {\tt <FONT>} is not)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTag::ScanParam}\label{wxhtmltagscanparam}
-
-\constfunc{wxString}{ScanParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{const wxChar *}{format}, \param{void *}{value}}
-
-This method scans the given parameter. Usage is exactly the same as sscanf's 
-usage except that you don't pass a string but a parameter name as the first
-argument
-and you can only retrieve one value (i.e. you can use only one "\%" element
-in {\it format}).
-
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{par}{The name of the tag you want to query}
-
-\docparam{format}{scanf()-like format string.}
-
-\docparam{value}{pointer to a variable to store the value in }
-

docs/latex/wx/httaghnd.tex

@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmltaghandler.tex at 18/Mar/99 19:20:29
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlTagHandler}}\label{wxhtmltaghandler}
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlpars.h>
-
-\wxheading{See Also}
-
-\helpref{Overview}{handlers},
-\helpref{wxHtmlTag}{wxhtmltag}
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTagHandler::m\_Parser}\label{wxhtmltaghandlermparser}
-
-{\bf wxHtmlParser* m\_Parser}
-
-This attribute is used to access parent parser. It is protected so that
-it can't be accessed by user but can be accessed from derived classes.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTagHandler::wxHtmlTagHandler}\label{wxhtmltaghandlerwxhtmltaghandler}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlTagHandler}{\void}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTagHandler::GetSupportedTags}\label{wxhtmltaghandlergetsupportedtags}
-
-\func{virtual wxString}{GetSupportedTags}{\void}
-
-Returns list of supported tags. The list is in uppercase and tags
-are delimited by ','. Example : {\tt "I,B,FONT,P" }
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTagHandler::HandleTag}\label{wxhtmltaghandlerhandletag}
-
-\func{virtual bool}{HandleTag}{\param{const wxHtmlTag\& }{tag}}
-
-This is the core method of each handler. It is called each time
-one of supported tags is detected. {\it tag} contains all necessary
-info (see \helpref{wxHtmlTag}{wxhtmltag} for details).
-
-\wxheading{Return value}
-
-true if \helpref{ParseInner}{wxhtmltaghandlerparseinner} was called,
-false otherwise.
-
-\wxheading{Example}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-bool MyHandler::HandleTag(const wxHtmlTag& tag)
-{
-    ...
-    // change state of parser (e.g. set bold face)
-    ParseInner(tag);
-    ...
-    // restore original state of parser
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-You shouldn't call ParseInner if the tag is not paired with an ending one.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTagHandler::ParseInner}\label{wxhtmltaghandlerparseinner}
-
-\func{void}{ParseInner}{\param{const wxHtmlTag\& }{tag}}
-
-This method calls parser's \helpref{DoParsing}{wxhtmlparserdoparsing} method
-for the string between this tag and the paired ending tag:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-...<A HREF="x.htm">Hello, world!</A>...
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In this example, a call to ParseInner (with {\it tag} pointing to A tag)
-will parse 'Hello, world!'.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTagHandler::SetParser}\label{wxhtmltaghandlersetparser}
-
-\func{virtual void}{SetParser}{\param{wxHtmlParser }{*parser}}
-
-Assigns {\it parser} to this handler. Each {\bf instance} of handler 
-is guaranteed to be called only from the parser.
-

docs/latex/wx/httagmod.tex

@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmltagsmodule.tex at 14/Mar/99 20:13:37
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlTagsModule}}\label{wxhtmltagsmodule}
-
-This class provides easy way of filling wxHtmlWinParser's table of
-tag handlers. It is used almost exclusively together with the set of
-\helpref{TAGS\_MODULE\_* macros}{handlers}
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxModule}{wxmodule}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/winpars.h>
-
-\wxheading{See Also}
-
-\helpref{Tag Handlers}{handlers},
-\helpref{wxHtmlTagHandler}{wxhtmltaghandler},
-\helpref{wxHtmlWinTagHandler}{wxhtmlwintaghandler},
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlTagsModule::FillHandlersTable}\label{wxhtmltagsmodulefillhandlerstable}
-
-\func{virtual void}{FillHandlersTable}{\param{wxHtmlWinParser }{*parser}}
-
-You must override this method. In most common case its body consists
-only of lines of the following type:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-parser -> AddTagHandler(new MyHandler);
-\end{verbatim}
-
-I recommend using the {\bf TAGS\_MODULE\_*} macros.
-
-\wxheading{Paremeters}
-
-\docparam{parser}{Pointer to the parser that requested tables filling.}
-

docs/latex/wx/http.tex

@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-\section{\class{wxHTTP}}\label{wxhttp}
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxProtocol}{wxprotocol}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/protocol/http.h>
-
-\wxheading{See also}
-
-\helpref{wxSocketBase}{wxsocketbase}, \helpref{wxURL}{wxurl}
-
-% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-% Members
-% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-\membersection{wxHTTP::GetInputStream}\label{wxhttpgetinputstream}
-
-\func{wxInputStream *}{GetInputStream}{\param{const wxString\&}{ path}}
-
-Creates a new input stream on the the specified path. You can use all except the seek
-functionality of wxStream. Seek isn't available on all streams. For example,
-http or ftp streams doesn't deal with it. Other functions like Tell and SeekI
-for this sort of stream.
-You will be notified when the EOF is reached by an error.
-
-\wxheading{Note}
-
-You can know the size of the file you are getting using \helpref{wxStreamBase::GetSize()}{wxstreambasegetsize}.
-But there is a limitation: as HTTP servers aren't obliged to pass the size of
-the file, in some case, you will be returned 0xfffffff by GetSize(). In these
-cases, you should use the value returned by \helpref{wxInputStream::LastRead()}{wxinputstreamlastread}:
-this value will be 0 when the stream is finished.
-
-\wxheading{Return value}
-
-Returns the initialized stream. You will have to delete it yourself once you
-don't use it anymore. The destructor closes the network connection.
-The next time you will try to get a file the network connection will have
-to be reestablished: but you don't have to take care of this wxHTTP reestablishes it automatically.
-
-\wxheading{See also}
-
-\helpref{wxInputStream}{wxinputstream}
-
-% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-\membersection{wxHTTP::SetHeader}
-
-\func{void}{SetHeader}{\param{const wxString\&}{ header}, \param{const wxString\&}{ h\_data}}
-
-It sets data of a field to be sent during the next request to the HTTP server. The field
-name is specified by {\it header} and the content by {\it h\_data}.
-This is a low level function and it assumes that you know what you are doing.
-
-\membersection{wxHTTP::GetHeader}
-
-\func{wxString}{GetHeader}{\param{const wxString\&}{ header}}
-
-Returns the data attached with a field whose name is specified by {\it header}.
-If the field doesn't exist, it will return an empty string and not a NULL string.
-
-\wxheading{Note}
-
-The header is not case-sensitive: I mean that "CONTENT-TYPE" and "content-type" 
-represent the same header.
-

docs/latex/wx/htwidget.tex

@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlcell.h at 14/Apr/99 20:12:40
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlWidgetCell}}\label{wxhtmlwidgetcell}
-
-wxHtmlWidgetCell is a class that provides a connection between HTML cells and widgets (an object derived
-from wxWindow). You can use it to display things like forms, input boxes etc. in an HTML window.
-
-wxHtmlWidgetCell takes care of resizing and moving window.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlCell}{wxhtmlcell}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlcell.h>
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWidgetCell::wxHtmlWidgetCell}\label{wxhtmlwidgetcellwxhtmlwidgetcell}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlWidgetCell}{\param{wxWindow* }{wnd}, \param{int }{w = 0}}
-
-Constructor.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{wnd}{Connected window. It is parent window {\bf must} be the wxHtmlWindow object within
-which it is displayed!}
-
-\docparam{w}{Floating width. If non-zero width of {\it wnd} window is adjusted so that it is
-always {\it w} percents of parent container's width. (For example w = 100 means that the window
-will always have same width as parent container)}
-

docs/latex/wx/htwindow.tex

@@ -1,383 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlwindow.tex at 14/Mar/99 20:13:37
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlWindow}}\label{wxhtmlwindow}
-
-wxHtmlWindow is probably the only class you will directly use
-unless you want to do something special (like adding new tag
-handlers or MIME filters).
-
-The purpose of this class is to display HTML pages (either local
-file or downloaded via HTTP protocol) in a window. The width
-of the window is constant - given in the constructor - and virtual height
-is changed dynamically depending on page size.
-Once the window is created you can set its content by calling 
-\helpref{SetPage(text)}{wxhtmlwindowsetpage},
-\helpref{LoadPage(filename)}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage} or
-\helpref{LoadFile}{wxhtmlwindowloadfile}.
-
-\wxheading{Note}
-
-wxHtmlWindow uses the \helpref{wxImage}{wximage} class for displaying images.
-Don't forget to initialize all image formats you need before loading any page!
-(See \helpref{wxInitAllImageHandlers}{wxinitallimagehandlers} and
-\helpref{wxImage::AddHandler}{wximageaddhandler}.)
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/htmlwin.h>
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::wxHtmlWindow}\label{wxhtmlwindowwxhtmlwindow}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlWindow}{\void}
-
-Default constructor.
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlWindow}{\param{wxWindow }{*parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id = -1}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize}, \param{long }{style = wxHW\_SCROLLBAR\_AUTO}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = "htmlWindow"}}
-
-Constructor. The parameters are the same as for the \helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow} constructor.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{style}{wxHW\_SCROLLBAR\_NEVER,  or wxHW\_SCROLLBAR\_AUTO. 
-Affects the appearance of vertical scrollbar in the window.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::AddFilter}\label{wxhtmlwindowaddfilter}
-
-\func{static void}{AddFilter}{\param{wxHtmlFilter }{*filter}}
-
-Adds \helpref{input filter}{filters} to the static list of available
-filters. These filters are present by default:
-
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
-\item {\tt text/html} MIME type
-\item {\tt image/*} MIME types
-\item Plain Text filter (this filter is used if no other filter matches)
-\end{itemize}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::AppendToPage}\label{wxhtmlwindowappendtopage}
-
-\func{bool}{AppendToPage}{\param{const wxString\& }{source}}
-
-Appends HTML fragment to currently displayed text and refreshes the window. 
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{source}{HTML code fragment}
-
-\wxheading{Return value}
-
-false if an error occurred, true otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::GetInternalRepresentation}\label{wxhtmlwindowgetinternalrepresentation}
-
-\constfunc{wxHtmlContainerCell*}{GetInternalRepresentation}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to the top-level container.
-
-See also: \helpref{Cells Overview}{cells}, 
-\helpref{Printing Overview}{printing}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::GetOpenedAnchor}\label{wxhtmlwindowgetopenedanchor}
-
-\func{wxString}{GetOpenedAnchor}{\void}
-
-Returns anchor within currently opened page
-(see \helpref{GetOpenedPage}{wxhtmlwindowgetopenedpage}). 
-If no page is opened or if the displayed page wasn't
-produced by call to LoadPage, empty string is returned.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::GetOpenedPage}\label{wxhtmlwindowgetopenedpage}
-
-\func{wxString}{GetOpenedPage}{\void}
-
-Returns full location of the opened page. If no page is opened or if the displayed page wasn't
-produced by call to LoadPage, empty string is returned.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::GetOpenedPageTitle}\label{wxhtmlwindowgetopenedpagetitle}
-
-\func{wxString}{GetOpenedPageTitle}{\void}
-
-Returns title of the opened page or wxEmptyString if current page does not contain {\tt <TITLE>} tag.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::GetRelatedFrame}\label{wxhtmlwindowgetrelatedframe}
-
-\constfunc{wxFrame*}{GetRelatedFrame}{\void}
-
-Returns the related frame.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::HistoryBack}\label{wxhtmlwindowhistoryback}
-
-\func{bool}{HistoryBack}{\void}
-
-Moves back to the previous page. (each page displayed using 
-\helpref{LoadPage}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage} is stored in history list.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::HistoryCanBack}\label{wxhtmlwindowhistorycanback}
-
-\func{bool}{HistoryCanBack}{\void}
-
-Returns true if it is possible to go back in the history (i.e. HistoryBack()
-won't fail).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::HistoryCanForward}\label{wxhtmlwindowhistorycanforward}
-
-\func{bool}{HistoryCanForward}{\void}
-
-Returns true if it is possible to go forward in the history (i.e. HistoryBack()
-won't fail).
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::HistoryClear}\label{wxhtmlwindowhistoryclear}
-
-\func{void}{HistoryClear}{\void}
-
-Clears history.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::HistoryForward}\label{wxhtmlwindowhistoryforward}
-
-\func{bool}{HistoryForward}{\void}
-
-Moves to next page in history.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::LoadFile}\label{wxhtmlwindowloadfile}
-
-\func{virtual bool}{LoadFile}{\param{const wxFileName\& }{filename}}
-
-Loads HTML page from file and displays it.
-
-\wxheading{Return value}
-
-false if an error occurred, true otherwise
-
-\wxheading{See also}
-
-\helpref{LoadPage}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::LoadPage}\label{wxhtmlwindowloadpage}
-
-\func{virtual bool}{LoadPage}{\param{const wxString\& }{location}}
-
-Unlike SetPage this function first loads HTML page from {\it location} 
-and then displays it. See example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-htmlwin->LoadPage("help/myproject/index.htm");
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{location}{The address of document. See \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} for details on address format and behaviour of "opener".}
-
-\wxheading{Return value}
-
-false if an error occurred, true otherwise
-
-\wxheading{See also}
-
-\helpref{LoadFile}{wxhtmlwindowloadfile}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnCellClicked}\label{wxhtmlwindowoncellclicked}
-
-\func{virtual void}{OnCellClicked}{\param{wxHtmlCell }{*cell}, \param{wxCoord }{x}, \param{wxCoord }{y}, \param{const wxMouseEvent\& }{event}}
-
-This method is called when a mouse button is clicked inside wxHtmlWindow.
-The default behaviour is to call 
-\helpref{OnLinkClicked}{wxhtmlwindowonlinkclicked} if the cell contains a
-hypertext link.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{cell}{The cell inside which the mouse was clicked, always a simple
-(i.e. non container) cell}
-
-\docparam{x, y}{The logical coordinates of the click point}
-
-\docparam{event}{The mouse event containing other information about the click}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnCellMouseHover}\label{wxhtmlwindowoncellmousehover}
-
-\func{virtual void}{OnCellMouseHover}{\param{wxHtmlCell }{*cell}, \param{wxCoord }{x}, \param{wxCoord }{y}}
-
-This method is called when a mouse moves over an HTML cell.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{cell}{The cell inside which the mouse is currently, always a simple
-(i.e. non container) cell}
-
-\docparam{x, y}{The logical coordinates of the click point}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnLinkClicked}\label{wxhtmlwindowonlinkclicked}
-
-\func{virtual void}{OnLinkClicked}{\param{const wxHtmlLinkInfo\& }{link}}
-
-Called when user clicks on hypertext link. Default behaviour is to call 
-\helpref{LoadPage}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage} and do nothing else.
-
-Also see \helpref{wxHtmlLinkInfo}{wxhtmllinkinfo}.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnOpeningURL}\label{wxhtmlwindowonopeningurl}
-
-\func{virtual wxHtmlOpeningStatus}{OnOpeningURL}{\param{wxHtmlURLType }{type},\param{const wxString\& }{url}, \param{wxString *}{redirect}}
-
-Called when an URL is being opened (either when the user clicks on a link or
-an image is loaded). The URL will be opened only if OnOpeningURL returns 
-{\tt wxHTML\_OPEN}. This method is called by
-\helpref{wxHtmlParser::OpenURL}{wxhtmlparseropenurl}.
-You can override OnOpeningURL to selectively block some
-URLs (e.g. for security reasons) or to redirect them elsewhere. Default
-behaviour is to always return {\tt wxHTML\_OPEN}.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{type}{Indicates type of the resource. Is one of
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_URL\_PAGE}}{Opening a HTML page.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_URL\_IMAGE}}{Opening an image.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_URL\_OTHER}}{Opening a resource that doesn't fall into
-any other category.}
-\end{twocollist}}
-
-\docparam{url}{URL being opened.}
-
-\docparam{redirect}{Pointer to wxString variable that must be filled with an
-URL if OnOpeningURL returns {\tt wxHTML\_REDIRECT}.}
-
-\wxheading{Return value}
-\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_OPEN}}{Open the URL.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_BLOCK}}{Deny access to the URL, \helpref{wxHtmlParser::OpenURL}{wxhtmlparseropenurl} will return NULL.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf wxHTML\_REDIRECT}}{Don't open {\it url}, redirect to another
-URL. OnOpeningURL must fill {\it *redirect} with the new URL. OnOpeningURL will
-be called again on returned URL.}
-\end{twocollist}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnSetTitle}\label{wxhtmlwindowonsettitle}
-
-\func{virtual void}{OnSetTitle}{\param{const wxString\& }{title}}
-
-Called on parsing {\tt <TITLE>} tag.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::ReadCustomization}\label{wxhtmlwindowreadcustomization}
-
-\func{virtual void}{ReadCustomization}{\param{wxConfigBase }{*cfg}, \param{wxString }{path = wxEmptyString}}
-
-This reads custom settings from wxConfig. It uses the path 'path'
-if given, otherwise it saves info into currently selected path.
-The values are stored in sub-path {\tt wxHtmlWindow}
-
-Read values: all things set by SetFonts, SetBorders.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{cfg}{wxConfig from which you want to read the configuration.}
-
-\docparam{path}{Optional path in config tree. If not given current path is used.}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetBorders}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetborders}
-
-\func{void}{SetBorders}{\param{int }{b}}
-
-This function sets the space between border of window and HTML contents. See image:
-
-\helponly{\image{}{border.bmp}}
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{b}{indentation from borders in pixels}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetFonts}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetfonts}
-
-\func{void}{SetFonts}{\param{wxString }{normal\_face}, \param{wxString }{fixed\_face}, \param{const int }{*sizes = NULL}}
-
-This function sets font sizes and faces.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{normal\_face}{This is face name for normal (i.e. non-fixed) font. 
-It can be either empty string (then the default face is chosen) or
-platform-specific face name. Examples are "helvetica" under Unix or
-"Times New Roman" under Windows.}
-
-\docparam{fixed\_face}{The same thing for fixed face ( <TT>..</TT> )}
-
-\docparam{sizes}{This is an array of 7 items of {\it int} type.
-The values represent size of font with HTML size from -2 to +4
-( <FONT SIZE=-2> to <FONT SIZE=+4> ). Default sizes are used if {\it sizes}
-is NULL.}
-
-\wxheading{Defaults}
-
-Default font sizes are defined by constants wxHTML\_FONT\_SIZE\_1,
-wxHTML\_FONT\_SIZE\_2, ..., wxHTML\_FONT\_SIZE\_7. Note that they differ among
-platforms. Default face names are empty strings.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetPage}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetpage}
-
-\func{bool}{SetPage}{\param{const wxString\& }{source}}
-
-Sets HTML page and display it. This won't {\bf load} the page!!
-It will display the {\it source}. See example:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-htmlwin -> SetPage("<html><body>Hello, world!</body></html>");
-\end{verbatim}
-
-If you want to load a document from some location use 
-\helpref{LoadPage}{wxhtmlwindowloadpage} instead.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{source}{The HTML document source to be displayed.}
-
-\wxheading{Return value}
-
-false if an error occurred, true otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetRelatedFrame}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedframe}
-
-\func{void}{SetRelatedFrame}{\param{wxFrame* }{frame}, \param{const wxString\& }{format}}
-
-Sets the frame in which page title will be displayed. {\it format} is format of
-frame title, e.g. "HtmlHelp : \%s". It must contain exactly one \%s. This
-\%s is substituted with HTML page title.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetRelatedStatusBar}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedstatusbar}
-
-\func{void}{SetRelatedStatusBar}{\param{int }{bar}}
-
-{\bf After} calling \helpref{SetRelatedFrame}{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedframe},
-this sets statusbar slot where messages will be displayed.
-(Default is -1 = no messages.)
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{bar}{statusbar slot number (0..n)}
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::WriteCustomization}\label{wxhtmlwindowwritecustomization}
-
-\func{virtual void}{WriteCustomization}{\param{wxConfigBase }{*cfg}, \param{wxString }{path = wxEmptyString}}
-
-Saves custom settings into wxConfig. It uses the path 'path'
-if given, otherwise it saves info into currently selected path.
-Regardless of whether the path is given or not, the function creates sub-path 
-{\tt wxHtmlWindow}.
-
-Saved values: all things set by SetFonts, SetBorders.
-
-\wxheading{Parameters}
-
-\docparam{cfg}{wxConfig to which you want to save the configuration.}
-
-\docparam{path}{Optional path in config tree. If not given, the current path is used.}
-

docs/latex/wx/htwinhnd.tex

@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlwintaghandler.tex at 14/Mar/99 20:13:37
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlWinTagHandler}}\label{wxhtmlwintaghandler}
-
-This is basically wxHtmlTagHandler except that
-it is extended with protected member m\_WParser pointing to
-the wxHtmlWinParser object (value of this member is identical
-to wxHtmlParser's m\_Parser).
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlTagHandler}{wxhtmltaghandler}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/winpars.h>
-
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinTagHandler::m\_WParser}\label{wxhtmlwintaghandlerwxhtmlwintaghandlermwparser}
-
-{\bf wxHtmlWinParser* m\_WParser}
-
-Value of this attribute is identical to value of m\_Parser. The only different
-is that m\_WParser points to wxHtmlWinParser object while m\_Parser
-points to wxHtmlParser object. (The same object, but overcast.)
-

docs/latex/wx/htwinprs.tex

@@ -1,298 +0,0 @@
-%
-% automatically generated by HelpGen from
-% htmlwinparser.tex at 14/Mar/99 20:13:37
-%
-
-\section{\class{wxHtmlWinParser}}\label{wxhtmlwinparser}
-
-This class is derived from \helpref{wxHtmlParser}{wxhtmlparser} and
-its main goal is to parse HTML input so that it can be displayed in
-\helpref{wxHtmlWindow}{wxhtmlwindow}. It uses a special 
-\helpref{wxHtmlWinTagHandler}{wxhtmlwintaghandler}.
-
-\wxheading{Notes}
-
-The product of parsing is a wxHtmlCell (resp. wxHtmlContainer) object.
-
-\wxheading{Derived from}
-
-\helpref{wxHtmlParser}{wxhtmlparser}
-
-\wxheading{Include files}
-
-<wx/html/winpars.h>
-
-\wxheading{See Also}
-
-\helpref{Handlers overview}{handlers}
-
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::wxHtmlWinParser}\label{wxhtmlwinparserwxhtmlwinparser}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlWinParser}{\void}
-
-\func{}{wxHtmlWinParser}{\param{wxHtmlWindow }{*wnd}}
-
-Constructor. Don't use the default one, use constructor with
-{\it wnd} parameter ({\it wnd} is pointer to associated \helpref{wxHtmlWindow}{wxhtmlwindow})
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::AddModule}\label{wxhtmlwinparseraddmodule}
-
-\func{static void}{AddModule}{\param{wxHtmlTagsModule }{*module}}
-
-Adds \helpref{module}{handlers} to the list of wxHtmlWinParser tag handler.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::CloseContainer}\label{wxhtmlwinparserclosecontainer}
-
-\func{wxHtmlContainerCell*}{CloseContainer}{\void}
-
-Closes the container, sets actual container to the parent one
-and returns pointer to it (see \helpref{Overview}{cells}).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::CreateCurrentFont}\label{wxhtmlwinparsercreatecurrentfont}
-
-\func{virtual wxFont*}{CreateCurrentFont}{\void}
-
-Creates font based on current setting (see 
-\helpref{SetFontSize}{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontsize}, 
-\helpref{SetFontBold}{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontbold}, 
-\helpref{SetFontItalic}{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontitalic}, 
-\helpref{SetFontFixed}{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontfixed}, 
-\helpref{SetFontUnderlined}{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontunderlined})
-and returns pointer to it.
-If the font was already created only a pointer is returned.
-
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetActualColor}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetactualcolor}
-
-\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetActualColor}{\void}
-
-Returns actual text colour.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetAlign}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetalign}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetAlign}{\void}
-
-Returns default horizontal alignment.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetCharHeight}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetcharheight}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetCharHeight}{\void}
-
-Returns (average) char height in standard font. It is used as DC-independent metrics.
-
-{\bf Note:} This function doesn't return the {\it actual} height. If you want to
-know the height of the current font, call {\tt GetDC -> GetCharHeight()}.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetCharWidth}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetcharwidth}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetCharWidth}{\void}
-
-Returns average char width in standard font. It is used as DC-independent metrics.
-
-{\bf Note:} This function doesn't return the {\it actual} width. If you want to
-know the height of the current font, call {\tt GetDC -> GetCharWidth()}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetContainer}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetcontainer}
-
-\constfunc{wxHtmlContainerCell*}{GetContainer}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to the currently opened container (see \helpref{Overview}{cells}).
-Common use:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-m_WParser -> GetContainer() -> InsertCell(new ...);
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetDC}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetdc}
-
-\func{wxDC*}{GetDC}{\void}
-
-Returns pointer to the DC used during parsing.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetEncodingConverter}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetencodingconverter}
-
-\constfunc{wxEncodingConverter *}{GetEncodingConverter}{\void}
-
-Returns \helpref{wxEncodingConverter}{wxencodingconverter} class used
-to do conversion between \helpref{input encoding}{wxhtmlwinparsergetinputencoding} 
-and \helpref{output encoding}{wxhtmlwinparsergetoutputencoding}.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontBold}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontbold}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetFontBold}{\void}
-
-Returns true if actual font is bold, false otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontFace}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontface}
-
-\constfunc{wxString}{GetFontFace}{\void}
-
-Returns actual font face name.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontFixed}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontfixed}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetFontFixed}{\void}
-
-Returns true if actual font is fixed face, false otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontItalic}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontitalic}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetFontItalic}{\void}
-
-Returns true if actual font is italic, false otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontSize}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontsize}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetFontSize}{\void}
-
-Returns actual font size (HTML size varies from -2 to +4)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontUnderlined}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontunderlined}
-
-\constfunc{int}{GetFontUnderlined}{\void}
-
-Returns true if actual font is underlined, false otherwise.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetInputEncoding}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetinputencoding}
-
-\constfunc{wxFontEncoding}{GetInputEncoding}{\void}
-
-Returns input encoding.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetLink}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetlink}
-
-\constfunc{const wxHtmlLinkInfo\&}{GetLink}{\void}
-
-Returns actual hypertext link. (This value has a non-empty 
-\helpref{Href}{wxhtmllinkinfogethref} string
-if the parser is between {\tt <A>} and {\tt </A>} tags,
-wxEmptyString otherwise.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetLinkColor}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetlinkcolor}
-
-\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetLinkColor}{\void}
-
-Returns the colour of hypertext link text.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetOutputEncoding}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetoutputencoding}
-
-\constfunc{wxFontEncoding}{GetOutputEncoding}{\void}
-
-Returns output encoding, i.e. closest match to document's input encoding
-that is supported by operating system.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetWindow}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetwindow}
-
-\func{wxHtmlWindow*}{GetWindow}{\void}
-
-Returns associated window (wxHtmlWindow). This may be NULL! (You should always
-test if it is non-NULL. For example {\tt TITLE} handler sets window
-title only if some window is associated, otherwise it does nothing)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::OpenContainer}\label{wxhtmlwinparseropencontainer}
-
-\func{wxHtmlContainerCell*}{OpenContainer}{\void}
-
-Opens new container and returns pointer to it (see \helpref{Overview}{cells}).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetActualColor}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetactualcolor}
-
-\func{void}{SetActualColor}{\param{const wxColour\& }{clr}}
-
-Sets actual text colour. Note: this DOESN'T change the colour!
-You must create \helpref{wxHtmlColourCell}{wxhtmlcolourcell} yourself.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetAlign}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetalign}
-
-\func{void}{SetAlign}{\param{int }{a}}
-
-Sets default horizontal alignment (see 
-\helpref{wxHtmlContainerCell::SetAlignHor}{wxhtmlcontainercellsetalignhor}.)
-Alignment of newly opened container is set to this value.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetContainer}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetcontainer}
-
-\func{wxHtmlContainerCell*}{SetContainer}{\param{wxHtmlContainerCell *}{c}}
-
-Allows you to directly set opened container. This is not recommended - you should use OpenContainer
-wherever possible.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetDC}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetdc}
-
-\func{virtual void}{SetDC}{\param{wxDC }{*dc}, \param{double }{pixel\_scale = 1.0}}
-
-Sets the DC. This must be called before \helpref{Parse}{wxhtmlparserparse}!
-{\it pixel\_scale}  can be used when rendering to high-resolution 
-DCs (e.g. printer) to adjust size of pixel metrics. (Many dimensions in 
-HTML are given in pixels -- e.g. image sizes. 300x300 image would be only one
-inch wide on typical printer. With pixel\_scale = 3.0 it would be 3 inches.)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontBold}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontbold}
-
-\func{void}{SetFontBold}{\param{int }{x}}
-
-Sets bold flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontFace}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontface}
-
-\func{void}{SetFontFace}{\param{const wxString\& }{face}}
-
-Sets current font face to {\it face}. This affects either fixed size
-font or proportional, depending on context (whether the parser is 
-inside {\tt <TT>} tag or not).
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontFixed}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontfixed}
-
-\func{void}{SetFontFixed}{\param{int }{x}}
-
-Sets fixed face flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontItalic}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontitalic}
-
-\func{void}{SetFontItalic}{\param{int }{x}}
-
-Sets italic flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontSize}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontsize}
-
-\func{void}{SetFontSize}{\param{int }{s}}
-
-Sets actual font size (HTML size varies from 1 to 7)
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontUnderlined}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontunderlined}
-
-\func{void}{SetFontUnderlined}{\param{int }{x}}
-
-Sets underlined flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFonts}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfonts}
-
-\func{void}{SetFonts}{\param{wxString }{normal\_face}, \param{wxString }{fixed\_face}, \param{const int }{*sizes = NULL}}
-
-Sets fonts. See \helpref{wxHtmlWindow::SetFonts}{wxhtmlwindowsetfonts} for
-detailed description.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetInputEncoding}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetinputencoding}
-
-\func{void}{SetInputEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{enc}}
-
-Sets input encoding. The parser uses this information to build conversion
-tables from document's encoding to some encoding supported by operating
-system.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetLink}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetlink}
-
-\func{void}{SetLink}{\param{const wxHtmlLinkInfo\& }{link}}
-
-Sets actual hypertext link. Empty link is represented
-by \helpref{wxHtmlLinkInfo}{wxhtmllinkinfo} with {\it Href} equal
-to wxEmptyString.
-
-\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetLinkColor}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetlinkcolor}
-
-\func{void}{SetLinkColor}{\param{const wxColour\& }{clr}}
-
-Sets colour of hypertext link.
-

include/wx/accel.h

@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/accel.h
+// Purpose:     wxAcceleratorEntry and wxAcceleratorTable classes
+// Author:      Julian Smart, Robert Roebling, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     31.05.01 (extracted from other files)
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_ACCEL
+
+#include "wx/object.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAcceleratorTable;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuItem;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxKeyEvent;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// wxAcceleratorEntry flags
+enum
+{
+    wxACCEL_NORMAL  = 0x0000,   // no modifiers
+    wxACCEL_ALT     = 0x0001,   // hold Alt key down
+    wxACCEL_CTRL    = 0x0002,   // hold Ctrl key down
+    wxACCEL_SHIFT   = 0x0004    // hold Shift key down
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// an entry in wxAcceleratorTable corresponds to one accelerator
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAcceleratorEntry
+{
+public:
+    wxAcceleratorEntry(int flags = 0, int keyCode = 0, int cmd = 0,
+                       wxMenuItem *item = NULL)
+    {
+        Set(flags, keyCode, cmd, item);
+    }
+
+    void Set(int flags, int keyCode, int cmd, wxMenuItem *item = NULL)
+    {
+        m_flags = flags;
+        m_keyCode = keyCode;
+        m_command = cmd;
+        m_item = item;
+    }
+
+    void SetMenuItem(wxMenuItem *item) { m_item = item; }
+
+    int GetFlags() const { return m_flags; }
+    int GetKeyCode() const { return m_keyCode; }
+    int GetCommand() const { return m_command; }
+
+    wxMenuItem *GetMenuItem() const { return m_item; }
+
+    bool operator==(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry) const
+    {
+        return m_flags == entry.m_flags &&
+               m_keyCode == entry.m_keyCode &&
+               m_command == entry.m_command &&
+               m_item == entry.m_item;
+    }
+
+    bool operator!=(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry) const
+        { return !(*this == entry); }
+
+#ifdef __WXMOTIF__
+    // Implementation use only
+    bool MatchesEvent(const wxKeyEvent& event) const ;
+#endif
+    
+private:
+    int m_flags;    // combination of wxACCEL_XXX constants
+    int m_keyCode;  // ASCII or virtual keycode
+    int m_command;  // Command id to generate
+
+    // the menu item this entry corresponds to, may be NULL
+    wxMenuItem *m_item;
+
+    // for compatibility with old code, use accessors now!
+    friend class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenu;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include wxAcceleratorTable class declaration, it is only used by the library
+// and so doesn't have any published user visible interface
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/generic/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/accel.h"
+#endif
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxAcceleratorTable) wxNullAcceleratorTable;
+
+#endif // wxUSE_ACCEL
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_

include/wx/app.h

@@ -0,0 +1,512 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        app.h
+// Purpose:     wxAppBase class and macros used for declaration of wxApp
+//              derived class in the user code
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart and Markus Holzem
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_APP_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_APP_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "appbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// typedefs
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if (defined(__WXMSW__) && !defined(__WXMICROWIN__)) || defined (__WXPM__)
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxApp;
+    typedef wxApp* (*wxAppInitializerFunction)();
+#else
+    // returning wxApp* won't work with gcc
+    #include "wx/object.h"
+
+    typedef wxObject* (*wxAppInitializerFunction)();
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCmdLineParser;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers we have to include here
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/event.h"       // for the base class
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    #include "wx/window.h"  // for wxTopLevelWindows
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+#if wxUSE_LOG
+    #include "wx/log.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static const int wxPRINT_WINDOWS = 1;
+static const int wxPRINT_POSTSCRIPT = 2;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// the common part of wxApp implementations for all platforms
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppBase : public wxEvtHandler
+{
+public:
+    wxAppBase();
+
+    // the virtual functions which may/must be overridden in the derived class
+    // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    virtual ~wxAppBase() { }
+#endif
+
+        // called during the program initialization, returning FALSE from here
+        // prevents the program from continuing - it's a good place to create
+        // the top level program window and return TRUE.
+        //
+        // Override: always in GUI application, rarely in console ones.
+    virtual bool OnInit();
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+        // a platform-dependent version of OnInit(): the code here is likely to
+        // depend on the toolkit. default version does nothing.
+        //
+        // Override: rarely.
+    virtual bool OnInitGui();
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+        // called to start program execution - the default version just enters
+        // the main GUI loop in which events are received and processed until
+        // the last window is not deleted (if GetExitOnFrameDelete) or
+        // ExitMainLoop() is called. In console mode programs, the execution
+        // of the program really starts here
+        //
+        // Override: rarely in GUI applications, always in console ones.
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    virtual int OnRun() { return MainLoop(); };
+#else // !GUI
+    virtual int OnRun() = 0;
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+        // called after the main loop termination. This is a good place for
+        // cleaning up (it may be too late in dtor) and is also useful if you
+        // want to return some non-default exit code - this is just the return
+        // value of this method.
+        //
+        // Override: often.
+    virtual int OnExit();
+
+        // called when a fatal exception occurs, this function should take care
+        // not to do anything which might provoke a nested exception! It may be
+        // overridden if you wish to react somehow in non-default way (core
+        // dump under Unix, application crash under Windows) to fatal program
+        // errors, however extreme care should be taken if you don't want this
+        // function to crash.
+        //
+        // Override: rarely.
+    virtual void OnFatalException() { }
+
+    // the worker functions - usually not used directly by the user code
+    // -----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+        // execute the main GUI loop, the function returns when the loop ends
+    virtual int MainLoop() = 0;
+
+        // exit the main GUI loop during the next iteration (i.e. it does not
+        // stop the program immediately!)
+    virtual void ExitMainLoop() = 0;
+
+        // returns TRUE if the program is initialized
+    virtual bool Initialized() = 0;
+
+        // returns TRUE if there are unprocessed events in the event queue
+    virtual bool Pending() = 0;
+
+        // process the first event in the event queue (blocks until an event
+        // apperas if there are none currently)
+    virtual void Dispatch() = 0;
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+    // application info: name, description, vendor
+    // -------------------------------------------
+
+    // NB: all these should be set by the application itself, there are no
+    //     reasonable default except for the application name which is taken to
+    //     be argv[0]
+
+        // set/get the application name
+    wxString GetAppName() const
+    {
+        if ( !m_appName )
+            return m_className;
+        else
+            return m_appName;
+    }
+    void SetAppName(const wxString& name) { m_appName = name; }
+
+        // set/get the app class name
+    wxString GetClassName() const { return m_className; }
+    void SetClassName(const wxString& name) { m_className = name; }
+
+        // set/get the vendor name
+    const wxString& GetVendorName() const { return m_vendorName; }
+    void SetVendorName(const wxString& name) { m_vendorName = name; }
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    // top level window functions
+    // --------------------------
+
+        // return TRUE if our app has focus
+    virtual bool IsActive() const { return m_isActive; }
+
+        // set the "main" top level window
+    void SetTopWindow(wxWindow *win) { m_topWindow = win; }
+
+        // return the "main" top level window (if it hadn't been set previously
+        // with SetTopWindow(), will return just some top level window and, if
+        // there are none, will return NULL)
+    virtual wxWindow *GetTopWindow() const
+    {
+        if (m_topWindow)
+            return m_topWindow;
+        else if (wxTopLevelWindows.GetCount() > 0)
+            return wxTopLevelWindows.GetFirst()->GetData();
+        else
+            return (wxWindow *)NULL;
+    }
+
+        // control the exit behaviour: by default, the program will exit the
+        // main loop (and so, usually, terminate) when the last top-level
+        // program window is deleted. Beware that if you disabel this (with
+        // SetExitOnFrameDelete(FALSE)), you'll have to call ExitMainLoop()
+        // explicitly from somewhere.
+    void SetExitOnFrameDelete(bool flag) { m_exitOnFrameDelete = flag; }
+    bool GetExitOnFrameDelete() const { return m_exitOnFrameDelete; }
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+    // cmd line parsing stuff
+    // ----------------------
+
+    // all of these methods may be overridden in the derived class to
+    // customize the command line parsing (by default only a few standard
+    // options are handled)
+    //
+    // you also need to call wxApp::OnInit() from YourApp::OnInit() for all
+    // this to work
+
+#if wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER
+    // this one is called from OnInit() to add all supported options
+    // to the given parser
+    virtual void OnInitCmdLine(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+
+    // called after successfully parsing the command line, return TRUE
+    // to continue and FALSE to exit
+    virtual bool OnCmdLineParsed(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+
+    // called if "--help" option was specified, return TRUE to continue
+    // and FALSE to exit
+    virtual bool OnCmdLineHelp(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+
+    // called if incorrect command line options were given, return
+    // FALSE to abort and TRUE to continue
+    virtual bool OnCmdLineError(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+#endif // wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER
+
+    // miscellaneous customization functions
+    // -------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_LOG
+        // override this function to create default log target of arbitrary
+        // user-defined class (default implementation creates a wxLogGui
+        // object) - this log object is used by default by all wxLogXXX()
+        // functions.
+    virtual wxLog *CreateLogTarget()
+        #if wxUSE_GUI && wxUSE_LOGGUI && !defined(__WXMICROWIN__)
+            { return new wxLogGui; }
+        #else // !GUI
+            { return new wxLogStderr; }
+        #endif // wxUSE_GUI
+#endif // wxUSE_LOG
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+        // get the standard icon used by wxWin dialogs - this allows the user
+        // to customize the standard dialogs. The 'which' parameter is one of
+        // wxICON_XXX values
+    virtual wxIcon GetStdIcon(int which) const = 0;
+
+        // VZ: what does this do exactly?
+    void SetWantDebugOutput( bool flag ) { m_wantDebugOutput = flag; }
+    bool GetWantDebugOutput() const { return m_wantDebugOutput; }
+
+        // set use of best visual flag (see below)
+    void SetUseBestVisual( bool flag ) { m_useBestVisual = flag; }
+    bool GetUseBestVisual() const { return m_useBestVisual; }
+
+        // set/get printing mode: see wxPRINT_XXX constants.
+        //
+        // default behaviour is the normal one for Unix: always use PostScript
+        // printing.
+    virtual void SetPrintMode(int WXUNUSED(mode)) { }
+    int GetPrintMode() const { return wxPRINT_POSTSCRIPT; }
+
+    // called by toolkit-specific code to set the app status: active (we have
+    // focus) or not and also the last window which had focus before we were
+    // deactivated
+    virtual void SetActive(bool isActive, wxWindow *lastFocus);
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+    // debugging support
+    // -----------------
+
+    // this function is called when an assert failure occurs, the base class
+    // version does the normal processing (i.e. shows the usual assert failure
+    // dialog box)
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+    virtual void OnAssert(const wxChar *file, int line, const wxChar *msg);
+#endif // __WXDEBUG__
+
+    // implementation only from now on
+    // -------------------------------
+
+    // helpers for dynamic wxApp construction
+    static void SetInitializerFunction(wxAppInitializerFunction fn)
+        { m_appInitFn = fn; }
+    static wxAppInitializerFunction GetInitializerFunction()
+        { return m_appInitFn; }
+
+    // process all events in the wxPendingEvents list
+    virtual void ProcessPendingEvents();
+
+    // access to the command line arguments
+    int      argc;
+    wxChar **argv;
+
+protected:
+    // function used for dynamic wxApp creation
+    static wxAppInitializerFunction m_appInitFn;
+
+    // application info (must be set from the user code)
+    wxString m_vendorName,      // vendor name (ACME Inc)
+             m_appName,         // app name
+             m_className;       // class name
+
+    // TRUE if the application wants to get debug output
+    bool m_wantDebugOutput;
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    // the main top level window - may be NULL
+    wxWindow *m_topWindow;
+
+    // if TRUE, exit the main loop when the last top level window is deleted
+    bool m_exitOnFrameDelete;
+
+    // TRUE if the apps whats to use the best visual on systems where
+    // more than one are available (Sun, SGI, XFree86 4.0 ?)
+    bool m_useBestVisual;
+
+    // does any of our windows has focus?
+    bool m_isActive;
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// now include the declaration of the real class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    #if defined(__WXMSW__)
+        #include "wx/msw/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+        #include "wx/motif/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+        #include "wx/mgl/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXQT__)
+        #include "wx/qt/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+        #include "wx/gtk/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+        #include "wx/mac/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXPM__)
+        #include "wx/os2/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+        #include "wx/stubs/app.h"
+    #endif
+#else // !GUI
+    // can't use typedef because wxApp forward declared as a class
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxApp : public wxAppBase
+    {
+    };
+#endif // GUI/!GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// the global data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// the one and only application object - use of wxTheApp in application code
+// is discouraged, consider using DECLARE_APP() after which you may call
+// wxGetApp() which will return the object of the correct type (i.e. MyApp and
+// not wxApp)
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxApp*) wxTheApp;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global functions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// event loop related functions only work in GUI programs
+// ------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Force an exit from main loop
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxExit();
+
+// Yield to other apps/messages
+extern bool WXDLLEXPORT wxYield();
+
+// Yield to other apps/messages
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxWakeUpIdle();
+
+// Post a message to the given eventhandler which will be processed during the
+// next event loop iteration
+inline void wxPostEvent(wxEvtHandler *dest, wxEvent& event)
+{
+    wxCHECK_RET( dest, wxT("need an object to post event to in wxPostEvent") );
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    dest->AddPendingEvent(event);
+#else
+    dest->ProcessEvent(event);
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+}
+
+// console applications may avoid using DECLARE_APP and IMPLEMENT_APP macros
+// and call these functions instead at the program startup and termination
+// -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if !wxUSE_GUI
+
+// initialize the library (may be called as many times as needed, but each
+// call to wxInitialize() must be matched by wxUninitialize())
+extern bool WXDLLEXPORT wxInitialize();
+
+// clean up - the library can't be used any more after the last call to
+// wxUninitialize()
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxUninitialize();
+
+// create an object of this class on stack to initialize/cleanup thel ibrary
+// automatically
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxInitializer
+{
+public:
+    // initialize the library
+    wxInitializer() { m_ok = wxInitialize(); }
+
+    // has the initialization been successful? (explicit test)
+    bool IsOk() const { return m_ok; }
+
+    // has the initialization been successful? (implicit test)
+    operator bool() const { return m_ok; }
+
+    // dtor only does clean up if we initialized the library properly
+    ~wxInitializer() { if ( m_ok ) wxUninitialize(); }
+
+private:
+    bool m_ok;
+};
+
+#endif // !wxUSE_GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// macros for dynamic creation of the application object
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Having a global instance of this class allows wxApp to be aware of the app
+// creator function. wxApp can then call this function to create a new app
+// object. Convoluted, but necessary.
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppInitializer
+{
+public:
+    wxAppInitializer(wxAppInitializerFunction fn)
+        { wxApp::SetInitializerFunction(fn); }
+};
+
+// Here's a macro you can use if your compiler really, really wants main() to
+// be in your main program (e.g. hello.cpp). Now IMPLEMENT_APP should add this
+// code if required.
+
+#if !wxUSE_GUI || defined(__WXMOTIF__) || defined(__WXGTK__) || defined(__WXPM__) || defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN \
+        extern int wxEntry( int argc, char *argv[] ); \
+        int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { return wxEntry(argc, argv); }
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__) && defined(__UNIX__)
+    // wxMac seems to have a specific wxEntry prototype
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN \
+        extern int wxEntry( int argc, char *argv[], bool enterLoop = 1 ); \
+        int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { return wxEntry(argc, argv); }
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__) && defined(WXUSINGDLL)
+    // NT defines APIENTRY, 3.x not
+    #if !defined(WXAPIENTRY)
+        #define WXAPIENTRY WXFAR wxSTDCALL
+    #endif
+
+    #include <windows.h>
+    #include "wx/msw/winundef.h"
+
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN \
+        extern "C" int WXAPIENTRY WinMain(HINSTANCE hInstance,\
+                                          HINSTANCE hPrevInstance,\
+                                          LPSTR m_lpCmdLine, int nCmdShow)\
+        {\
+            return wxEntry((WXHINSTANCE) hInstance,\
+                           (WXHINSTANCE) hPrevInstance,\
+                           m_lpCmdLine, nCmdShow);\
+        }
+#else
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __WXUNIVERSAL__
+    #include "wx/univ/theme.h"
+
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WX_THEME_SUPPORT \
+        WX_USE_THEME(win32); \
+        WX_USE_THEME(gtk);
+#else
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WX_THEME_SUPPORT
+#endif
+
+// Use this macro if you want to define your own main() or WinMain() function
+// and call wxEntry() from there.
+#define IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_MAIN(appname)                   \
+    wxApp *wxCreateApp() { return new appname; }         \
+    wxAppInitializer wxTheAppInitializer((wxAppInitializerFunction) wxCreateApp); \
+    appname& wxGetApp() { return *(appname *)wxTheApp; }
+
+// Same as IMPLEMENT_APP() normally but doesn't include themes support in
+// wxUniversal builds
+#define IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_THEMES(appname)    \
+    IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_MAIN(appname)          \
+    IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN
+
+// Use this macro exactly once, the argument is the name of the wxApp-derived
+// class which is the class of your application.
+#define IMPLEMENT_APP(appname)              \
+    IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_THEMES(appname)        \
+    IMPLEMENT_WX_THEME_SUPPORT
+
+// this macro can be used multiple times and just allows you to use wxGetApp()
+// function
+#define DECLARE_APP(appname) extern appname& wxGetApp();
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_APP_H_BASE_

include/wx/bitmap.h

@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/bitmap.h
+// Purpose:     wxBitmap class interface
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     22.04.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "bitmapbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/object.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/gdiobj.h"
+#include "wx/gdicmn.h"  // for wxBitmapType
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmap;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapHandler;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxImage;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMask;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPalette;
+
+#if defined(__WXMGL__) || defined(__WXMAC__)
+// Only used by some ports
+// FIXME -- make all ports (but MSW which uses wxGDIImage) use these base classes
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBitmapHandler: class which knows how to create/load/save bitmaps in
+// different formats
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapHandlerBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxBitmapHandlerBase()
+    {
+        m_type = wxBITMAP_TYPE_INVALID;
+    }
+
+    virtual ~wxBitmapHandlerBase() { }
+
+    virtual bool Create(wxBitmap *bitmap, void *data, long flags,
+                          int width, int height, int depth = 1) = 0;
+    virtual bool LoadFile(wxBitmap *bitmap, const wxString& name, long flags,
+                          int desiredWidth, int desiredHeight) = 0;
+    virtual bool SaveFile(const wxBitmap *bitmap, const wxString& name,
+                          int type, const wxPalette *palette = NULL) = 0;
+
+    void SetName(const wxString& name) { m_name = name; }
+    void SetExtension(const wxString& ext) { m_extension = ext; }
+    void SetType(wxBitmapType type) { m_type = type; }
+    wxString GetName() const { return m_name; }
+    wxString GetExtension() const { return m_extension; }
+    wxBitmapType GetType() const { return m_type; }
+
+protected:
+    wxString      m_name;
+    wxString      m_extension;
+    wxBitmapType  m_type;
+
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxBitmapHandlerBase)
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapBase : public wxGDIObject
+{
+public:
+    wxBitmapBase() : wxGDIObject() {}
+    virtual ~wxBitmapBase() {}
+
+    /*
+    Derived class must implement these:
+
+    wxBitmap();
+    wxBitmap(int width, int height, int depth = -1);
+    wxBitmap(const char bits[], int width, int height, int depth = 1);
+    wxBitmap(const char **bits);
+    wxBitmap(char **bits);
+    wxBitmap(const wxBitmap& bmp);
+    wxBitmap(const wxString &filename, wxBitmapType type = wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM);
+    wxBitmap(const wxImage& image, int depth = -1);
+    wxBitmap& operator = (const wxBitmap& bmp);
+    bool operator == (const wxBitmap& bmp) const;
+    bool operator != (const wxBitmap& bmp) const;
+
+    bool Create(int width, int height, int depth = -1);
+
+    static void InitStandardHandlers();
+    */
+
+    virtual bool Ok() const = 0;
+
+    virtual int GetHeight() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetWidth() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetDepth() const = 0;
+
+    virtual wxImage ConvertToImage() const = 0;
+
+    virtual wxMask *GetMask() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetMask(wxMask *mask) = 0;
+
+    virtual wxBitmap GetSubBitmap(const wxRect& rect) const = 0;
+
+    virtual bool SaveFile(const wxString &name, wxBitmapType type,
+                          const wxPalette *palette = (wxPalette *)NULL) const = 0;
+    virtual bool LoadFile(const wxString &name, wxBitmapType type) = 0;
+
+    virtual wxPalette *GetPalette() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetPalette(const wxPalette& palette) = 0;
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+    wxPalette *GetColourMap() const { return GetPalette(); }
+    void SetColourMap(wxPalette *cmap) { SetPalette(*cmap); };
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+
+    // copies the contents and mask of the given (colour) icon to the bitmap
+    virtual bool CopyFromIcon(const wxIcon& icon) = 0;
+
+    // implementation:
+    virtual void SetHeight(int height) = 0;
+    virtual void SetWidth(int width) = 0;
+    virtual void SetDepth(int depth) = 0;
+
+    // Format handling
+    static inline wxList& GetHandlers() { return sm_handlers; }
+    static void AddHandler(wxBitmapHandlerBase *handler);
+    static void InsertHandler(wxBitmapHandlerBase *handler);
+    static bool RemoveHandler(const wxString& name);
+    static wxBitmapHandler *FindHandler(const wxString& name);
+    static wxBitmapHandler *FindHandler(const wxString& extension, wxBitmapType bitmapType);
+    static wxBitmapHandler *FindHandler(wxBitmapType bitmapType);
+
+    //static void InitStandardHandlers();
+    //  (wxBitmap must implement this one)
+
+    static void CleanUpHandlers();
+
+protected:
+    static wxList sm_handlers;
+
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxBitmapBase)
+};
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/bitmap.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_

include/wx/bmpbuttn.h

@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/bmpbutton.h
+// Purpose:     wxBitmapButton class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     25.08.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_BMPBUTTON
+
+#include "wx/bitmap.h"
+#include "wx/button.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxButtonNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBitmapButton: a button which shows bitmaps instead of the usual string.
+// It has different bitmaps for different states (focused/disabled/pressed)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapButtonBase : public wxButton
+{
+public:
+    wxBitmapButtonBase() { m_marginX = m_marginY = 0; }
+
+    // set the bitmaps
+    void SetBitmapLabel(const wxBitmap& bitmap)
+        { m_bmpNormal = bitmap; OnSetBitmap(); }
+    void SetBitmapSelected(const wxBitmap& sel)
+        { m_bmpSelected = sel; OnSetBitmap(); };
+    void SetBitmapFocus(const wxBitmap& focus)
+        { m_bmpFocus = focus; OnSetBitmap(); };
+    void SetBitmapDisabled(const wxBitmap& disabled)
+        { m_bmpDisabled = disabled; OnSetBitmap(); };
+    void SetLabel(const wxBitmap& bitmap)
+        { SetBitmapLabel(bitmap); }
+
+    // retrieve the bitmaps
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapLabel() const { return m_bmpNormal; }
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapSelected() const { return m_bmpSelected; }
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapFocus() const { return m_bmpFocus; }
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapDisabled() const { return m_bmpDisabled; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapLabel() { return m_bmpNormal; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapSelected() { return m_bmpSelected; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapFocus() { return m_bmpFocus; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapDisabled() { return m_bmpDisabled; }
+
+    // set/get the margins around the button
+    virtual void SetMargins(int x, int y) { m_marginX = x; m_marginY = y; }
+    int GetMarginX() const { return m_marginX; }
+    int GetMarginY() const { return m_marginY; }
+
+protected:
+    // function called when any of the bitmaps changes
+    virtual void OnSetBitmap() { }
+
+    // the bitmaps for various states
+    wxBitmap m_bmpNormal,
+             m_bmpSelected,
+             m_bmpFocus,
+             m_bmpDisabled;
+
+    // the margins around the bitmap
+    int m_marginX,
+        m_marginY;
+private:
+    // Prevent Virtual function hiding warnings
+    void SetLabel(const wxString& rsLabel)
+    { wxWindowBase::SetLabel(rsLabel); }
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/bmpbuttn.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_BMPBUTTON
+
+#endif // _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_

include/wx/brush.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/brush.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_

include/wx/button.h

@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/button.h
+// Purpose:     wxButtonBase class
+// Author:      Vadim Zetlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     15.08.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zetlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_BUTTON
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxButton flags
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// all these flags are obsolete
+#define wxBU_NOAUTODRAW      0x0000
+#define wxBU_AUTODRAW        0x0004
+#define wxBU_LEFT            0x0040
+#define wxBU_TOP             0x0080
+#define wxBU_RIGHT           0x0100
+#define wxBU_BOTTOM          0x0200
+
+// by default, the buttons will be created with some (system dependent)
+// minimal size to make them look nicer, giving this style will make them as
+// small as possible
+#define wxBU_EXACTFIT        0x0001
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmap;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxButtonNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxButton: a push button
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxButtonBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // show the image in the button in addition to the label
+    virtual void SetImageLabel(const wxBitmap& WXUNUSED(bitmap)) { }
+
+    // set the margins around the image
+    virtual void SetImageMargins(wxCoord WXUNUSED(x), wxCoord WXUNUSED(y)) { }
+
+    // this wxButton method is called when the button becomes the default one
+    // on its panel
+    virtual void SetDefault() { }
+
+    // returns the default button size for this platform
+    static wxSize GetDefaultSize();
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/button.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_BUTTON
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_

include/wx/checkbox.h

@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/checkbox.h
+// Purpose:     wxCheckBox class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     07.09.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_CHECKBOX
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxCheckBoxNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCheckBox: a control which shows a label and a box which may be checked
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCheckBoxBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // set/get the checked status of the listbox
+    virtual void SetValue(bool value) = 0;
+    virtual bool GetValue() const = 0;
+
+    bool IsChecked() const { return GetValue(); }
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/checkbox.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CHECKBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_

include/wx/checklst.h

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/checklst.h
+// Purpose:     wxCheckListBox class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     12.09.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_CHECKLISTBOX
+
+#include "wx/listbox.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCheckListBox: a listbox whose items may be checked
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCheckListBoxBase : public wxListBox
+{
+public:
+    // check list box specific methods
+    virtual bool IsChecked(size_t item) const = 0;
+    virtual void Check(size_t item, bool check = TRUE) = 0;
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/checklst.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CHECKLISTBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_

include/wx/choice.h

@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/choice.h
+// Purpose:     wxChoice class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "choicebase.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_CHOICE
+
+#include "wx/ctrlsub.h"     // the base class
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxChoiceNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxChoice allows to select one of a non-modifiable list of strings
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxChoiceBase : public wxControlWithItems
+{
+public:
+    // all generic methods are in wxControlWithItems
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    virtual ~wxChoiceBase() {}
+#endif
+
+    // single selection logic
+    virtual void SetSelection(int n) = 0;
+    virtual bool SetStringSelection(const wxString& s);
+
+    // don't override this
+    virtual void Select(int n) { SetSelection(n); }
+
+    // set/get the number of columns in the control (as they're not supporte on
+    // most platforms, they do nothing by default)
+    virtual void SetColumns(int WXUNUSED(n) = 1 ) { }
+    virtual int GetColumns() const { return 1 ; }
+
+    // emulate selecting the item event.GetInt()
+    void Command(wxCommandEvent& event);
+
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-dependent class definition
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/choice.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CHOICE
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_

include/wx/clipbrd.h

@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/clipbrd.h
+// Purpose:     wxClipboad class and clipboard functions
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     19.10.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows Team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "clipboardbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_CLIPBOARD
+
+
+#include "wx/object.h"
+#include "wx/wxchar.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataFormat;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObject;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxClipboard represents the system clipboard. Normally, you should use
+// wxTheClipboard which is a global pointer to the (unique) clipboard.
+//
+// Clipboard can be used to copy data to/paste data from. It works together
+// with wxDataObject.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxClipboardBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxClipboardBase();
+
+    // open the clipboard before Add/SetData() and GetData()
+    virtual bool Open() = 0;
+
+    // close the clipboard after Add/SetData() and GetData()
+    virtual void Close() = 0;
+
+    // query whether the clipboard is opened
+    virtual bool IsOpened() const = 0;
+
+    // add to the clipboard data
+    //
+    // NB: the clipboard owns the pointer and will delete it, so data must be
+    //     allocated on the heap
+    virtual bool AddData( wxDataObject *data ) = 0;
+
+    // set the clipboard data, this is the same as Clear() followed by
+    // AddData()
+    virtual bool SetData( wxDataObject *data ) = 0;
+
+    // ask if data in correct format is available
+    virtual bool IsSupported( const wxDataFormat& format ) = 0;
+
+    // fill data with data on the clipboard (if available)
+    virtual bool GetData( wxDataObject& data ) = 0;
+    
+    // clears wxTheClipboard and the system's clipboard if possible
+    virtual void Clear() = 0;
+
+    // flushes the clipboard: this means that the data which is currently on
+    // clipboard will stay available even after the application exits (possibly
+    // eating memory), otherwise the clipboard will be emptied on exit
+    virtual bool Flush() { return FALSE; }
+
+    // X11 has two clipboards which get selected by this call. Empty on MSW.
+    virtual void UsePrimarySelection( bool WXUNUSED(primary) = FALSE ) { }
+
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform-specific class declaration
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/clipbrd.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// globals
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// The global clipboard object
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxClipboard *) wxTheClipboard;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// helpful class for opening the clipboard and automatically closing it
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxClipboardLocker
+{
+public:
+    wxClipboardLocker(wxClipboard *clipboard = (wxClipboard *)NULL)
+    {
+        m_clipboard = clipboard ? clipboard : wxTheClipboard;
+        if ( m_clipboard )
+        {
+            m_clipboard->Open();
+        }
+    }
+
+    bool operator!() const { return !m_clipboard->IsOpened(); }
+
+    ~wxClipboardLocker()
+    {
+        if ( m_clipboard )
+        {
+            m_clipboard->Close();
+        }
+    }
+
+private:
+    wxClipboard *m_clipboard;
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CLIPBOARD
+
+#endif // _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_

include/wx/colour.h

@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+#ifndef _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/colour.h"
+#endif
+
+#define wxColor wxColour
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_

include/wx/combobox.h

@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/combobox.h
+// Purpose:     wxComboBox declaration
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     24.12.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996-2000 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_COMBOBOX
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxComboBoxNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxComboBoxBase: this interface defines the methods wxComboBox must implement
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/ctrlsub.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxComboBoxBase : public wxItemContainer
+{
+public:
+    // wxTextCtrl-like methods wxComboBox must implement
+    virtual wxString GetValue() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetValue(const wxString& value) = 0;
+
+    virtual void Copy() = 0;
+    virtual void Cut() = 0;
+    virtual void Paste() = 0;
+    virtual void SetInsertionPoint(long pos) = 0;
+    virtual long GetInsertionPoint() const = 0;
+    virtual long GetLastPosition() const = 0;
+    virtual void Replace(long from, long to, const wxString& value) = 0;
+    virtual void SetSelection(long from, long to) = 0;
+    virtual void SetEditable(bool editable) = 0;
+
+    virtual void SetInsertionPointEnd()
+        { SetInsertionPoint(GetLastPosition()); }
+    virtual void Remove(long from, long to)
+        { Replace(from, to, wxEmptyString); }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-dependent header defining the real class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/combobox.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_COMBOBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_

include/wx/control.h

@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/control.h
+// Purpose:     wxControl common interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "controlbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_CONTROLS
+
+#include "wx/window.h"      // base class
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxControlNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxControl is the base class for all controls
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxControlBase : public wxWindow
+{
+public:
+    // Create() function adds the validator parameter
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                long style = 0,
+                const wxValidator& validator = wxDefaultValidator,
+                const wxString& name = wxControlNameStr);
+
+    // simulates the event of given type (i.e. wxButton::Command() is just as
+    // if the button was clicked)
+    virtual void Command(wxCommandEvent &event);
+
+    // get the control alignment (left/right/centre, top/bottom/centre)
+    int GetAlignment() const { return m_windowStyle & wxALIGN_MASK; }
+
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    virtual ~wxControlBase() { }
+#endif
+
+protected:
+    // creates the control (calls wxWindowBase::CreateBase inside) and adds it
+    // to the list of parents children
+    bool CreateControl(wxWindowBase *parent,
+                       wxWindowID id,
+                       const wxPoint& pos,
+                       const wxSize& size,
+                       long style,
+                       const wxValidator& validator,
+                       const wxString& name);
+
+    // inherit colour and font settings from the parent window
+    void InheritAttributes();
+
+    // initialize the common fields of wxCommandEvent
+    void InitCommandEvent(wxCommandEvent& event) const;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform-dependent wxControl declarations
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/control.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CONTROLS
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_

include/wx/cursor.h

@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+#ifndef _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/cursor.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/utils.h"
+
+/* This is a small class which can be used by all ports
+   to temporarily suspend the busy cursor. Useful in modal
+   dialogs.
+
+   Actually that is not (any longer) quite true..  currently it is
+   only used in wxGTK Dialog::ShowModal() and now uses static
+   wxBusyCursor methods that are only implemented for wxGTK so far.
+   The BusyCursor handling code should probably be implemented in
+   common code somewhere instead of the separate implementations we
+   currently have.  Also the name BusyCursorSuspender is a little
+   misleading since it doesn't actually suspend the BusyCursor, just
+   masks one that is already showing.
+   If another call to wxBeginBusyCursor is made while this is active
+   the Busy Cursor will again be shown.  But at least now it doesn't
+   interfere with the state of wxIsBusy() -- RL
+
+*/
+class wxBusyCursorSuspender
+{
+public:
+    wxBusyCursorSuspender()
+    {
+        if( wxIsBusy() )
+        {
+            wxSetCursor( wxBusyCursor::GetStoredCursor() );
+        }
+    }
+    ~wxBusyCursorSuspender()
+    {
+        if( wxIsBusy() )
+        {
+            wxSetCursor( wxBusyCursor::GetBusyCursor() );
+        }
+    }
+};
+#endif
+    // _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_

include/wx/dataobj.h

@@ -0,0 +1,467 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dataobj.h
+// Purpose:     common data object classes
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin, Robert Roebling
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.05.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows Team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DATAOBJ_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DATAOBJ_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "dataobjbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/bitmap.h"
+#include "wx/list.h"
+
+// ============================================================================
+/*
+   Generic data transfer related classes. The class hierarchy is as follows:
+
+                                - wxDataObject-
+                               /               \
+                              /                 \
+            wxDataObjectSimple                  wxDataObjectComposite
+           /           |      \
+          /            |       \
+   wxTextDataObject    |     wxBitmapDataObject
+                       |
+               wxCustomDataObject
+
+*/
+// ============================================================================
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataFormat class is declared in platform-specific headers: it represents
+// a format for data which may be either one of the standard ones (text,
+// bitmap, ...) or a custom one which is then identified by a unique string.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/* the class interface looks like this (pseudo code):
+
+class wxDataFormat
+{
+public:
+    typedef <integral type> NativeFormat;
+
+    wxDataFormat(NativeFormat format = wxDF_INVALID);
+    wxDataFormat(const wxChar *format);
+
+    wxDataFormat& operator=(NativeFormat format);
+    wxDataFormat& operator=(const wxDataFormat& format);
+
+    bool operator==(NativeFormat format) const;
+    bool operator!=(NativeFormat format) const;
+
+    void SetType(NativeFormat format);
+    NativeFormat GetType() const;
+
+    wxString GetId() const;
+    void SetId(const wxChar *format);
+};
+
+*/
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dataform.h"
+#endif
+
+// the value for default argument to some functions (corresponds to
+// wxDF_INVALID)
+extern WXDLLEXPORT const wxDataFormat& wxFormatInvalid;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataObject represents a piece of data which knows which formats it
+// supports and knows how to render itself in each of them - GetDataHere(),
+// and how to restore data from the buffer (SetData()).
+//
+// Although this class may be used directly (i.e. custom classes may be
+// derived from it), in many cases it might be simpler to use either
+// wxDataObjectSimple or wxDataObjectComposite classes.
+//
+// A data object may be "read only", i.e. support only GetData() functions or
+// "read-write", i.e. support both GetData() and SetData() (in principle, it
+// might be "write only" too, but this is rare). Moreover, it doesn't have to
+// support the same formats in Get() and Set() directions: for example, a data
+// object containing JPEG image might accept BMPs in GetData() because JPEG
+// image may be easily transformed into BMP but not in SetData(). Accordingly,
+// all methods dealing with formats take an additional "direction" argument
+// which is either SET or GET and which tells the function if the format needs
+// to be supported by SetData() or GetDataHere().
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObjectBase
+{
+public:
+    enum Direction
+    {
+        Get  = 0x01,    // format is supported by GetDataHere()
+        Set  = 0x02,    // format is supported by SetData()
+        Both = 0x03     // format is supported by both (unused currently)
+    };
+
+    // this class is polymorphic, hence it needs a virtual dtor
+    virtual ~wxDataObjectBase();
+
+    // get the best suited format for rendering our data
+    virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(Direction dir = Get) const = 0;
+
+    // get the number of formats we support
+    virtual size_t GetFormatCount(Direction dir = Get) const = 0;
+
+    // return all formats in the provided array (of size GetFormatCount())
+    virtual void GetAllFormats(wxDataFormat *formats,
+                               Direction dir = Get) const = 0;
+
+    // get the (total) size of data for the given format
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const = 0;
+
+    // copy raw data (in the specified format) to the provided buffer, return
+    // TRUE if data copied successfully, FALSE otherwise
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void *buf) const = 0;
+
+    // get data from the buffer of specified length (in the given format),
+    // return TRUE if the data was read successfully, FALSE otherwise
+    virtual bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format),
+                         size_t WXUNUSED(len), const void * WXUNUSED(buf))
+    {
+        return FALSE;
+    }
+
+    // returns TRUE if this format is supported
+    bool IsSupported(const wxDataFormat& format, Direction dir = Get) const;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-specific declarations of wxDataObject
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/dnd.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataObjectSimple is a wxDataObject which only supports one format (in
+// both Get and Set directions, but you may return FALSE from GetDataHere() or
+// SetData() if one of them is not supported). This is the simplest possible
+// wxDataObject implementation.
+//
+// This is still an "abstract base class" (although it doesn't have any pure
+// virtual functions), to use it you should derive from it and implement
+// GetDataSize(), GetDataHere() and SetData() functions because the base class
+// versions don't do anything - they just return "not implemented".
+//
+// This class should be used when you provide data in only one format (no
+// conversion to/from other formats), either a standard or a custom one.
+// Otherwise, you should use wxDataObjectComposite or wxDataObject directly.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObjectSimple : public wxDataObject
+{
+public:
+    // ctor takes the format we support, but it can also be set later with
+    // SetFormat()
+    wxDataObjectSimple(const wxDataFormat& format = wxFormatInvalid)
+        : m_format(format)
+        {
+        }
+
+    // get/set the format we support
+    const wxDataFormat& GetFormat() const { return m_format; }
+    void SetFormat(const wxDataFormat& format) { m_format = format; }
+
+    // virtual functions to override in derived class (the base class versions
+    // just return "not implemented")
+    // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // get the size of our data
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const
+        { return 0; }
+
+    // copy our data to the buffer
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *WXUNUSED(buf)) const
+        { return FALSE; }
+
+    // copy data from buffer to our data
+    virtual bool SetData(size_t WXUNUSED(len), const void *WXUNUSED(buf))
+        { return FALSE; }
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(wxDataObjectBase::Direction WXUNUSED(dir) = Get) const
+        { return m_format; }
+    virtual size_t GetFormatCount(wxDataObjectBase::Direction WXUNUSED(dir) = Get) const
+        { return 1; }
+    virtual void GetAllFormats(wxDataFormat *formats,
+                               wxDataObjectBase::Direction WXUNUSED(dir) = Get) const
+        { *formats = m_format; }
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format)) const
+        { return GetDataSize(); }
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format),
+                             void *buf) const
+        { return GetDataHere(buf); }
+    virtual bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format),
+                         size_t len, const void *buf)
+        { return SetData(len, buf); }
+
+private:
+    // the one and only format we support
+    wxDataFormat m_format;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataObjectComposite is the simplest way to implement wxDataObject
+// supporting multiple formats. It contains several wxDataObjectSimple and
+// supports all formats supported by any of them.
+//
+// This class shouldn't be (normally) derived from, but may be used directly.
+// If you need more flexibility than what it provides, you should probably use
+// wxDataObject directly.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_LIST(wxDataObjectSimple, wxSimpleDataObjectList);
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObjectComposite : public wxDataObject
+{
+public:
+    // ctor
+    wxDataObjectComposite() { m_preferred = 0; }
+
+    // add data object (it will be deleted by wxDataObjectComposite, hence it
+    // must be allocated on the heap) whose format will become the preferred
+    // one if preferred == TRUE
+    void Add(wxDataObjectSimple *dataObject, bool preferred = FALSE);
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(wxDataObjectBase::Direction dir = Get) const;
+    virtual size_t GetFormatCount(wxDataObjectBase::Direction dir = Get) const;
+    virtual void GetAllFormats(wxDataFormat *formats, wxDataObjectBase::Direction dir = Get) const;
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const;
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void *buf) const;
+    virtual bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& format, size_t len, const void *buf);
+
+protected:
+    // returns the pointer to the object which supports this format or NULL
+    wxDataObjectSimple *GetObject(const wxDataFormat& format) const;
+
+private:
+    // the list of all (simple) data objects whose formats we support
+    wxSimpleDataObjectList m_dataObjects;
+
+    // the index of the preferred one (0 initially, so by default the first
+    // one is the preferred)
+    size_t m_preferred;
+};
+
+// ============================================================================
+// Standard implementations of wxDataObjectSimple which can be used directly
+// (i.e. without having to derive from them) for standard data type transfers.
+//
+// Note that although all of them can work with provided data, you can also
+// override their virtual GetXXX() functions to only provide data on demand.
+// ============================================================================
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTextDataObject contains text data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextDataObject : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // ctor: you can specify the text here or in SetText(), or override
+    // GetText()
+    wxTextDataObject(const wxString& text = wxEmptyString)
+        : wxDataObjectSimple(wxDF_TEXT), m_text(text)
+        {
+        }
+
+    // virtual functions which you may override if you want to provide text on
+    // demand only - otherwise, the trivial default versions will be used
+    virtual size_t GetTextLength() const { return m_text.Len() + 1; }
+    virtual wxString GetText() const { return m_text; }
+    virtual void SetText(const wxString& text) { m_text = text; }
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const;
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *buf) const;
+    virtual bool SetData(size_t len, const void *buf);
+
+private:
+    wxString m_text;
+
+    // virtual function hiding supression
+    size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataSize(format)); }
+    bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void *pBuf) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataHere(format, pBuf)); }
+    bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& format, size_t nLen, const void* pBuf)
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::SetData(format, nLen, pBuf)); }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBitmapDataObject contains a bitmap
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapDataObjectBase : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // ctor: you can specify the bitmap here or in SetBitmap(), or override
+    // GetBitmap()
+    wxBitmapDataObjectBase(const wxBitmap& bitmap = wxNullBitmap)
+        : wxDataObjectSimple(wxDF_BITMAP), m_bitmap(bitmap)
+        {
+        }
+
+    // virtual functions which you may override if you want to provide data on
+    // demand only - otherwise, the trivial default versions will be used
+    virtual wxBitmap GetBitmap() const { return m_bitmap; }
+    virtual void SetBitmap(const wxBitmap& bitmap) { m_bitmap = bitmap; }
+
+protected:
+    wxBitmap m_bitmap;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileDataObject contains a list of filenames
+//
+// NB: notice that this is a "write only" object, it can only be filled with
+//     data from drag and drop operation.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileDataObjectBase : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // ctor: use AddFile() later to fill the array
+    wxFileDataObjectBase() : wxDataObjectSimple(wxDF_FILENAME) { }
+
+    // get a reference to our array
+    const wxArrayString& GetFilenames() const { return m_filenames; }
+
+    // the Get() functions do nothing for us
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const { return 0; }
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *WXUNUSED(buf)) const { return FALSE; }
+
+protected:
+    wxArrayString m_filenames;
+
+private:
+    // Virtual function hiding supression
+    size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataSize(format)); }
+    bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void* pBuf) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataHere(format, pBuf)); }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCustomDataObject contains arbitrary untyped user data.
+//
+// It is understood that this data can be copied bitwise.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCustomDataObject : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // if you don't specify the format in the ctor, you can still use
+    // SetFormat() later
+    wxCustomDataObject(const wxDataFormat& format = wxFormatInvalid);
+
+    // the dtor calls Free()
+    virtual ~wxCustomDataObject();
+
+    // you can call SetData() to set m_data: it will make a copy of the data
+    // you pass - or you can use TakeData() which won't copy anything, but
+    // will take ownership of data (i.e. will call Free() on it later)
+    void TakeData(size_t size, void *data);
+
+    // this function is called to allocate "size" bytes of memory from
+    // SetData(). The default version uses operator new[].
+    virtual void *Alloc(size_t size);
+
+    // this function is called when the data is freed, you may override it to
+    // anything you want (or may be nothing at all). The default version calls
+    // operator delete[] on m_data
+    virtual void Free();
+
+    // get data: you may override these functions if you wish to provide data
+    // only when it's requested
+    virtual size_t GetSize() const { return m_size; }
+    virtual void *GetData() const { return m_data; }
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const;
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *buf) const;
+    virtual bool SetData(size_t size, const void *buf);
+
+private:
+    size_t m_size;
+    void  *m_data;
+
+    // virtual function hiding supression
+    size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataSize(format)); }
+    bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void* pBuf) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataHere(format, pBuf)); }
+    bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& format, size_t nLen, const void* pBuf)
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::SetData(format, nLen, pBuf)); }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform-specific declarations of wxXXXBase classes
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dataobj2.h"
+
+    // wxURLDataObject defined in msw/ole/dataobj2.h
+#else // !__WXMSW__
+    #if defined(__WXGTK__)
+        #include "wx/gtk/dataobj2.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+        #include "wx/mac/dataobj2.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXPM__)
+        #include "wx/os2/dataobj2.h"
+    #endif
+
+    // wxURLDataObject is simply wxTextDataObject with a different name
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxURLDataObject : public wxTextDataObject
+    {
+    public:
+        wxString GetURL() const { return GetText(); }
+    };
+#endif // __WXMSW__/!__WXMSW__
+
+#endif // _WX_DATAOBJ_H_BASE_

include/wx/dc.h

@@ -0,0 +1,812 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        dc.h
+// Purpose:     wxDC class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     05/25/99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DC_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DC_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "dcbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers which we must include here
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/object.h"          // the base class
+
+#include "wx/cursor.h"          // we have member variables of these classes
+#include "wx/font.h"            // so we can't do without them
+#include "wx/colour.h"
+#include "wx/brush.h"
+#include "wx/pen.h"
+#include "wx/palette.h"
+
+#include "wx/list.h"            // we use wxList in inline functions
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCBase;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDrawObject
+{
+public:
+
+    wxDrawObject()
+    {
+        ResetBoundingBox();
+    }
+
+    virtual ~wxDrawObject() { }
+
+    virtual void Draw(wxDCBase&) const { }
+
+    virtual void CalcBoundingBox(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+    {
+      if ( m_isBBoxValid )
+      {
+         if ( x < m_minX ) m_minX = x;
+         if ( y < m_minY ) m_minY = y;
+         if ( x > m_maxX ) m_maxX = x;
+         if ( y > m_maxY ) m_maxY = y;
+      }
+      else
+      {
+         m_isBBoxValid = TRUE;
+
+         m_minX = x;
+         m_minY = y;
+         m_maxX = x;
+         m_maxY = y;
+      }
+    }
+
+    void ResetBoundingBox()
+    {
+        m_isBBoxValid = FALSE;
+
+        m_minX = m_maxX = m_minY = m_maxY = 0;
+    }
+
+    // Get the final bounding box of the PostScript or Metafile picture.
+
+    wxCoord MinX() const { return m_minX; }
+    wxCoord MaxX() const { return m_maxX; }
+    wxCoord MinY() const { return m_minY; }
+    wxCoord MaxY() const { return m_maxY; }
+
+    //to define the type of object for derived objects
+    virtual int GetType()=0;
+
+protected:
+    //for boundingbox calculation
+    bool m_isBBoxValid:1;
+    //for boundingbox calculation
+    wxCoord m_minX, m_minY, m_maxX, m_maxY;
+};
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global variables
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern int) wxPageNumber;
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDC is the device context - object on which any drawing is done
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxDCBase()
+    {
+        m_clipping = FALSE;
+        m_ok = TRUE;
+
+        ResetBoundingBox();
+
+        m_signX = m_signY = 1;
+
+        m_logicalOriginX = m_logicalOriginY =
+        m_deviceOriginX = m_deviceOriginY = 0;
+
+        m_logicalScaleX = m_logicalScaleY =
+        m_userScaleX = m_userScaleY =
+        m_scaleX = m_scaleY = 1.0;
+
+        m_logicalFunction = wxCOPY;
+
+        m_backgroundMode = wxTRANSPARENT;
+
+        m_mappingMode = wxMM_TEXT;
+
+        m_backgroundBrush = *wxTRANSPARENT_BRUSH;
+
+        m_textForegroundColour = *wxBLACK;
+        m_textBackgroundColour = *wxWHITE;
+
+        m_colour = wxColourDisplay();
+    }
+
+    ~wxDCBase() { }
+
+    virtual void BeginDrawing() { }
+    virtual void EndDrawing() { }
+
+    // graphic primitives
+    // ------------------
+
+    virtual void DrawObject(wxDrawObject* drawobject)
+    {
+        drawobject->Draw(*this);
+        CalcBoundingBox(drawobject->MinX(),drawobject->MinY());
+        CalcBoundingBox(drawobject->MaxX(),drawobject->MaxY());
+    }
+
+    void FloodFill(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, const wxColour& col,
+                   int style = wxFLOOD_SURFACE)
+        { DoFloodFill(x, y, col, style); }
+    void FloodFill(const wxPoint& pt, const wxColour& col,
+                   int style = wxFLOOD_SURFACE)
+        { DoFloodFill(pt.x, pt.y, col, style); }
+
+    bool GetPixel(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxColour *col) const
+        { return DoGetPixel(x, y, col); }
+    bool GetPixel(const wxPoint& pt, wxColour *col) const
+        { return DoGetPixel(pt.x, pt.y, col); }
+
+    void DrawLine(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1, wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2)
+        { DoDrawLine(x1, y1, x2, y2); }
+    void DrawLine(const wxPoint& pt1, const wxPoint& pt2)
+        { DoDrawLine(pt1.x, pt1.y, pt2.x, pt2.y); }
+
+    void CrossHair(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoCrossHair(x, y); }
+    void CrossHair(const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoCrossHair(pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawArc(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1, wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2,
+                 wxCoord xc, wxCoord yc)
+        { DoDrawArc(x1, y1, x2, y2, xc, yc); }
+    void DrawArc(const wxPoint& pt1, const wxPoint& pt2, const wxPoint& centre)
+        { DoDrawArc(pt1.x, pt1.y, pt2.x, pt2.y, centre.x, centre.y); }
+
+    void DrawCheckMark(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                       wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoDrawCheckMark(x, y, width, height); }
+    void DrawCheckMark(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoDrawCheckMark(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+
+    void DrawEllipticArc(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord w, wxCoord h,
+                         double sa, double ea)
+        { DoDrawEllipticArc(x, y, w, h, sa, ea); }
+    void DrawEllipticArc(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz,
+                         double sa, double ea)
+        { DoDrawEllipticArc(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y, sa, ea); }
+
+    void DrawPoint(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoDrawPoint(x, y); }
+    void DrawPoint(const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoDrawPoint(pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawLines(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                   wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0)
+        { DoDrawLines(n, points, xoffset, yoffset); }
+    void DrawLines(const wxList *list,
+                   wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0);
+
+    void DrawPolygon(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                     wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0,
+                     int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE)
+        { DoDrawPolygon(n, points, xoffset, yoffset, fillStyle); }
+
+    void DrawPolygon(const wxList *list,
+                     wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0,
+                     int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE);
+
+    void DrawRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoDrawRectangle(x, y, width, height); }
+    void DrawRectangle(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz)
+        { DoDrawRectangle(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y); }
+    void DrawRectangle(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoDrawRectangle(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+
+    void DrawRoundedRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+                              double radius)
+        { DoDrawRoundedRectangle(x, y, width, height, radius); }
+    void DrawRoundedRectangle(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz,
+                             double radius)
+        { DoDrawRoundedRectangle(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y, radius); }
+    void DrawRoundedRectangle(const wxRect& r, double radius)
+        { DoDrawRoundedRectangle(r.x, r.y, r.width, r.height, radius); }
+
+    void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(x - radius, y - radius, 2*radius, 2*radius); }
+    void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(x, y, width, height); }
+    void DrawEllipse(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y); }
+    void DrawEllipse(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+
+    void DrawIcon(const wxIcon& icon, wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoDrawIcon(icon, x, y); }
+    void DrawIcon(const wxIcon& icon, const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoDrawIcon(icon, pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawBitmap(const wxBitmap &bmp, wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                    bool useMask = FALSE)
+        { DoDrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, useMask); }
+    void DrawBitmap(const wxBitmap &bmp, const wxPoint& pt,
+                    bool useMask = FALSE)
+        { DoDrawBitmap(bmp, pt.x, pt.y, useMask); }
+
+    void DrawText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoDrawText(text, x, y); }
+    void DrawText(const wxString& text, const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoDrawText(text, pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawRotatedText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y, double angle)
+        { DoDrawRotatedText(text, x, y, angle); }
+    void DrawRotatedText(const wxString& text, const wxPoint& pt, double angle)
+        { DoDrawRotatedText(text, pt.x, pt.y, angle); }
+
+    // this version puts both optional bitmap and the text into the given
+    // rectangle and aligns is as specified by alignment parameter; it also
+    // will emphasize the character with the given index if it is != -1 and
+    // return the bounding rectangle if required
+    virtual void DrawLabel(const wxString& text,
+                           const wxBitmap& image,
+                           const wxRect& rect,
+                           int alignment = wxALIGN_LEFT | wxALIGN_TOP,
+                           int indexAccel = -1,
+                           wxRect *rectBounding = NULL);
+
+    void DrawLabel(const wxString& text, const wxRect& rect,
+                   int alignment = wxALIGN_LEFT | wxALIGN_TOP,
+                   int indexAccel = -1)
+        { DrawLabel(text, wxNullBitmap, rect, alignment, indexAccel); }
+
+    bool Blit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+              wxDC *source, wxCoord xsrc, wxCoord ysrc,
+              int rop = wxCOPY, bool useMask = FALSE, wxCoord xsrcMask = -1, wxCoord ysrcMask = -1)
+    {
+        return DoBlit(xdest, ydest, width, height,
+                      source, xsrc, ysrc, rop, useMask, xsrcMask, ysrcMask);
+    }
+    bool Blit(const wxPoint& destPt, const wxSize& sz,
+              wxDC *source, const wxPoint& srcPt,
+              int rop = wxCOPY, bool useMask = FALSE, const wxPoint& srcPtMask = wxPoint(-1, -1))
+    {
+        return DoBlit(destPt.x, destPt.y, sz.x, sz.y,
+                      source, srcPt.x, srcPt.y, rop, useMask, srcPtMask.x, srcPtMask.y);
+    }
+
+#if wxUSE_SPLINES
+    // TODO: this API needs fixing (wxPointList, why (!const) "wxList *"?)
+    void DrawSpline(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1,
+                    wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2,
+                    wxCoord x3, wxCoord y3);
+    void DrawSpline(int n, wxPoint points[]);
+
+    void DrawSpline(wxList *points) { DoDrawSpline(points); }
+#endif // wxUSE_SPLINES
+
+    // global DC operations
+    // --------------------
+
+    virtual void Clear() = 0;
+
+    virtual bool StartDoc(const wxString& WXUNUSED(message)) { return TRUE; }
+    virtual void EndDoc() { }
+
+    virtual void StartPage() { }
+    virtual void EndPage() { }
+
+    // set objects to use for drawing
+    // ------------------------------
+
+    virtual void SetFont(const wxFont& font) = 0;
+    virtual void SetPen(const wxPen& pen) = 0;
+    virtual void SetBrush(const wxBrush& brush) = 0;
+    virtual void SetBackground(const wxBrush& brush) = 0;
+    virtual void SetBackgroundMode(int mode) = 0;
+    virtual void SetPalette(const wxPalette& palette) = 0;
+
+    // clipping region
+    // ---------------
+
+    void SetClippingRegion(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoSetClippingRegion(x, y, width, height); }
+    void SetClippingRegion(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz)
+        { DoSetClippingRegion(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y); }
+    void SetClippingRegion(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoSetClippingRegion(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+    void SetClippingRegion(const wxRegion& region)
+        { DoSetClippingRegionAsRegion(region); }
+
+    virtual void DestroyClippingRegion() = 0;
+
+    void GetClippingBox(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y, wxCoord *w, wxCoord *h) const
+        { DoGetClippingBox(x, y, w, h); }
+    void GetClippingBox(wxRect& rect) const
+        {
+          // Necessary to use intermediate variables for 16-bit compilation
+          wxCoord x, y, w, h;
+          DoGetClippingBox(&x, &y, &w, &h);
+          rect.x = x; rect.y = y; rect.width = w; rect.height = h;
+        }
+
+    // text extent
+    // -----------
+
+    virtual wxCoord GetCharHeight() const = 0;
+    virtual wxCoord GetCharWidth() const = 0;
+
+    // only works for single line strings
+    void GetTextExtent(const wxString& string,
+                       wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                       wxCoord *descent = NULL,
+                       wxCoord *externalLeading = NULL,
+                       wxFont *theFont = NULL) const
+        { DoGetTextExtent(string, x, y, descent, externalLeading, theFont); }
+
+    // works for single as well as multi-line strings
+    virtual void GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& text,
+                                        wxCoord *width,
+                                        wxCoord *height,
+                                        wxCoord *heightLine = NULL,
+                                        wxFont *font = NULL);
+
+    // size and resolution
+    // -------------------
+
+    // in device units
+    void GetSize(int *width, int *height) const
+        { DoGetSize(width, height); }
+    wxSize GetSize() const
+    {
+        int w, h;
+        DoGetSize(&w, &h);
+
+        return wxSize(w, h);
+    }
+
+    // in mm
+    void GetSizeMM(int* width, int* height) const
+        { DoGetSizeMM(width, height); }
+    wxSize GetSizeMM() const
+    {
+        int w, h;
+        DoGetSizeMM(&w, &h);
+
+        return wxSize(w, h);
+    }
+
+    // coordinates conversions
+    // -----------------------
+
+    // This group of functions does actual conversion of the input, as you'd
+    // expect.
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalX(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalY(wxCoord y) const;
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalXRel(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalYRel(wxCoord y) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceX(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceY(wxCoord y) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceXRel(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceYRel(wxCoord y) const;
+
+    // query DC capabilities
+    // ---------------------
+
+    virtual bool CanDrawBitmap() const = 0;
+    virtual bool CanGetTextExtent() const = 0;
+
+    // colour depth
+    virtual int GetDepth() const = 0;
+
+    // Resolution in Pixels per inch
+    virtual wxSize GetPPI() const = 0;
+
+    virtual bool Ok() const { return m_ok; }
+
+    // accessors
+    // ---------
+
+        // const...
+    int GetBackgroundMode() const { return m_backgroundMode; }
+    const wxBrush&  GetBackground() const { return m_backgroundBrush; }
+    const wxBrush&  GetBrush() const { return m_brush; }
+    const wxFont&   GetFont() const { return m_font; }
+    const wxPen&    GetPen() const { return m_pen; }
+    const wxColour& GetTextBackground() const { return m_textBackgroundColour; }
+    const wxColour& GetTextForeground() const { return m_textForegroundColour; }
+
+        // ... and non const
+    wxBrush&  GetBackground() { return m_backgroundBrush; }
+    wxBrush&  GetBrush() { return m_brush; }
+    wxFont&   GetFont() { return m_font; }
+    wxPen&    GetPen() { return m_pen; }
+    wxColour& GetTextBackground() { return m_textBackgroundColour; }
+    wxColour& GetTextForeground() { return m_textForegroundColour; }
+
+    virtual void SetTextForeground(const wxColour& colour)
+        { m_textForegroundColour = colour; }
+    virtual void SetTextBackground(const wxColour& colour)
+        { m_textBackgroundColour = colour; }
+
+    int GetMapMode() const { return m_mappingMode; }
+    virtual void SetMapMode(int mode) = 0;
+
+    virtual void GetUserScale(double *x, double *y) const
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_userScaleX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_userScaleY;
+    }
+    virtual void SetUserScale(double x, double y) = 0;
+
+    virtual void GetLogicalScale(double *x, double *y)
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_logicalScaleX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_logicalScaleY;
+    }
+    virtual void SetLogicalScale(double x, double y)
+    {
+        m_logicalScaleX = x;
+        m_logicalScaleY = y;
+    }
+
+    void GetLogicalOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+        { DoGetLogicalOrigin(x, y); }
+    wxPoint GetLogicalOrigin() const
+        { wxCoord x, y; DoGetLogicalOrigin(&x, &y); return wxPoint(x, y); }
+    virtual void SetLogicalOrigin(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    void GetDeviceOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+        { DoGetDeviceOrigin(x, y); }
+    wxPoint GetDeviceOrigin() const
+        { wxCoord x, y; DoGetDeviceOrigin(&x, &y); return wxPoint(x, y); }
+    virtual void SetDeviceOrigin(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    virtual void SetAxisOrientation(bool xLeftRight, bool yBottomUp) = 0;
+
+    int GetLogicalFunction() const { return m_logicalFunction; }
+    virtual void SetLogicalFunction(int function) = 0;
+
+    // Sometimes we need to override optimization, e.g. if other software is
+    // drawing onto our surface and we can't be sure of who's done what.
+    //
+    // FIXME: is this (still) used?
+    virtual void SetOptimization(bool WXUNUSED(opt)) { }
+    virtual bool GetOptimization() { return FALSE; }
+
+    // Some platforms have a DC cache, which should be cleared
+    // at appropriate points such as after a series of DC operations.
+    // Put ClearCache in the wxDC implementation class, since it has to be
+    // static.
+    // static void ClearCache() ;
+#if 0 // wxUSE_DC_CACHEING
+    static void EnableCache(bool cacheing) { sm_cacheing = cacheing; }
+    static bool CacheEnabled() { return sm_cacheing ; }
+#endif
+
+    // bounding box
+    // ------------
+
+    virtual void CalcBoundingBox(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+    {
+      if ( m_isBBoxValid )
+      {
+         if ( x < m_minX ) m_minX = x;
+         if ( y < m_minY ) m_minY = y;
+         if ( x > m_maxX ) m_maxX = x;
+         if ( y > m_maxY ) m_maxY = y;
+      }
+      else
+      {
+         m_isBBoxValid = TRUE;
+
+         m_minX = x;
+         m_minY = y;
+         m_maxX = x;
+         m_maxY = y;
+      }
+    }
+
+    void ResetBoundingBox()
+    {
+        m_isBBoxValid = FALSE;
+
+        m_minX = m_maxX = m_minY = m_maxY = 0;
+    }
+
+    // Get the final bounding box of the PostScript or Metafile picture.
+    wxCoord MinX() const { return m_minX; }
+    wxCoord MaxX() const { return m_maxX; }
+    wxCoord MinY() const { return m_minY; }
+    wxCoord MaxY() const { return m_maxY; }
+
+    // misc old functions
+    // ------------------
+
+    // for compatibility with the old code when wxCoord was long everywhere
+#ifndef __WIN16__
+    void GetTextExtent(const wxString& string,
+                       long *x, long *y,
+                       long *descent = NULL,
+                       long *externalLeading = NULL,
+                       wxFont *theFont = NULL) const
+    {
+        wxCoord x2, y2, descent2, externalLeading2;
+        DoGetTextExtent(string, &x2, &y2,
+                        &descent2, &externalLeading2,
+                        theFont);
+        if ( x )
+            *x = x2;
+        if ( y )
+            *y = y2;
+        if ( descent )
+            *descent = descent2;
+        if ( externalLeading )
+            *externalLeading = externalLeading2;
+    }
+
+    void GetLogicalOrigin(long *x, long *y) const
+    {
+        wxCoord x2, y2;
+        DoGetLogicalOrigin(&x2, &y2);
+        if ( x )
+            *x = x2;
+        if ( y )
+            *y = y2;
+    }
+
+    void GetDeviceOrigin(long *x, long *y) const
+    {
+        wxCoord x2, y2;
+        DoGetDeviceOrigin(&x2, &y2);
+        if ( x )
+            *x = x2;
+        if ( y )
+            *y = y2;
+    }
+    void GetClippingBox(long *x, long *y, long *w, long *h) const
+    {
+        wxCoord xx,yy,ww,hh;
+        DoGetClippingBox(&xx, &yy, &ww, &hh);
+        if (x) *x = xx;
+        if (y) *y = yy;
+        if (w) *w = ww;
+        if (h) *h = hh;
+    }
+#endif // !Win16
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+    virtual void SetColourMap(const wxPalette& palette) { SetPalette(palette); }
+    void GetTextExtent(const wxString& string, float *x, float *y,
+            float *descent = NULL, float *externalLeading = NULL,
+            wxFont *theFont = NULL, bool use16bit = FALSE) const ;
+    void GetSize(float* width, float* height) const { int w, h; GetSize(& w, & h); *width = w; *height = h; }
+    void GetSizeMM(float *width, float *height) const { long w, h; GetSizeMM(& w, & h); *width = (float) w; *height = (float) h; }
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+
+protected:
+    // the pure virtual functions which should be implemented by wxDC
+    virtual void DoFloodFill(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, const wxColour& col,
+                             int style = wxFLOOD_SURFACE) = 0;
+
+    virtual bool DoGetPixel(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxColour *col) const = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawPoint(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawLine(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1, wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawArc(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1,
+                           wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2,
+                           wxCoord xc, wxCoord yc) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawCheckMark(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                                 wxCoord width, wxCoord height);
+    virtual void DoDrawEllipticArc(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord w, wxCoord h,
+                                   double sa, double ea) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawRoundedRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                                        wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+                                        double radius) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                               wxCoord width, wxCoord height) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoCrossHair(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawIcon(const wxIcon& icon, wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawBitmap(const wxBitmap &bmp, wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                              bool useMask = FALSE) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawRotatedText(const wxString& text,
+                                   wxCoord x, wxCoord y, double angle) = 0;
+
+    virtual bool DoBlit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest,
+                        wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+                        wxDC *source, wxCoord xsrc, wxCoord ysrc,
+                        int rop = wxCOPY, bool useMask = FALSE, wxCoord xsrcMask = -1, wxCoord ysrcMask = -1) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoGetSize(int *width, int *height) const = 0;
+    virtual void DoGetSizeMM(int* width, int* height) const = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawLines(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                             wxCoord xoffset, wxCoord yoffset) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawPolygon(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                               wxCoord xoffset, wxCoord yoffset,
+                               int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoSetClippingRegionAsRegion(const wxRegion& region) = 0;
+    virtual void DoSetClippingRegion(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                                     wxCoord width, wxCoord height) = 0;
+
+    // FIXME are these functions really different?
+    virtual void DoGetClippingRegion(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                                     wxCoord *w, wxCoord *h)
+        { DoGetClippingBox(x, y, w, h); }
+    virtual void DoGetClippingBox(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                                  wxCoord *w, wxCoord *h) const
+    {
+        if ( m_clipping )
+        {
+            if ( x ) *x = m_clipX1;
+            if ( y ) *y = m_clipY1;
+            if ( w ) *w = m_clipX2 - m_clipX1;
+            if ( h ) *h = m_clipY2 - m_clipY1;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            *x = *y = *w = *h = 0;
+        }
+    }
+
+    virtual void DoGetLogicalOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_logicalOriginX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_logicalOriginY;
+    }
+
+    virtual void DoGetDeviceOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_deviceOriginX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_deviceOriginY;
+    }
+
+    virtual void DoGetTextExtent(const wxString& string,
+                                 wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                                 wxCoord *descent = NULL,
+                                 wxCoord *externalLeading = NULL,
+                                 wxFont *theFont = NULL) const = 0;
+
+#if wxUSE_SPLINES
+    virtual void DoDrawSpline(wxList *points);
+#endif
+
+protected:
+    // flags
+    bool m_colour:1;
+    bool m_ok:1;
+    bool m_clipping:1;
+    bool m_isInteractive:1;
+    bool m_isBBoxValid:1;
+#if wxUSE_DC_CACHEING
+//    static bool sm_cacheing;
+#endif
+
+    // coordinate system variables
+
+    // TODO short descriptions of what exactly they are would be nice...
+
+    wxCoord m_logicalOriginX, m_logicalOriginY;
+    wxCoord m_deviceOriginX, m_deviceOriginY;
+
+    double m_logicalScaleX, m_logicalScaleY;
+    double m_userScaleX, m_userScaleY;
+    double m_scaleX, m_scaleY;
+
+    // Used by SetAxisOrientation() to invert the axes
+    int m_signX, m_signY;
+
+    // bounding and clipping boxes
+    wxCoord m_minX, m_minY, m_maxX, m_maxY;
+    wxCoord m_clipX1, m_clipY1, m_clipX2, m_clipY2;
+
+    int m_logicalFunction;
+    int m_backgroundMode;
+    int m_mappingMode;
+
+    // GDI objects
+    wxPen             m_pen;
+    wxBrush           m_brush;
+    wxBrush           m_backgroundBrush;
+    wxColour          m_textForegroundColour;
+    wxColour          m_textBackgroundColour;
+    wxFont            m_font;
+    wxPalette         m_palette;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDCBase)
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxDCBase)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// now include the declaration of wxDC class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/dc.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// helper class: you can use it to temporarily change the DC text colour and
+// restore it automatically when the object goes out of scope
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCTextColourChanger
+{
+public:
+    wxDCTextColourChanger(wxDC& dc) : m_dc(dc) { }
+
+    ~wxDCTextColourChanger()
+    {
+        if ( m_colFgOld.Ok() )
+            m_dc.SetTextForeground(m_colFgOld);
+    }
+
+    void Set(const wxColour& col)
+    {
+        if ( !m_colFgOld.Ok() )
+            m_colFgOld = m_dc.GetTextForeground();
+        m_dc.SetTextForeground(col);
+    }
+
+private:
+    wxDC& m_dc;
+
+    wxColour m_colFgOld;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// another small helper class: sets the clipping region in its ctor and
+// destroys it in the dtor
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCClipper
+{
+public:
+    wxDCClipper(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& r) : m_dc(dc)
+        { dc.SetClippingRegion(r.x, r.y, r.width, r.height); }
+    wxDCClipper(wxDC& dc, wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord w, wxCoord h) : m_dc(dc)
+        { dc.SetClippingRegion(x, y, w, h); }
+
+    ~wxDCClipper() { m_dc.DestroyClippingRegion(); }
+
+private:
+    wxDC& m_dc;
+};
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DC_H_BASE_

include/wx/dcclient.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/dcclient.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_

include/wx/dcmemory.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/dcmemory.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_

include/wx/dcscreen.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/dcscreen.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_

include/wx/dde.h

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DDE_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DDE_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/dde.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DDE_H_BASE_

include/wx/dialog.h

@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dialog.h
+// Purpose:     wxDialogBase class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29.06.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "dialogbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/panel.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDialogBase : public wxPanel
+{
+public:
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    ~wxDialogBase() { }
+#endif
+    // the modal dialogs have a return code - usually the id of the last
+    // pressed button
+    void SetReturnCode(int returnCode) { m_returnCode = returnCode; }
+    int GetReturnCode() const { return m_returnCode; }
+
+#if wxUSE_STATTEXT && wxUSE_TEXTCTRL
+    // splits text up at newlines and places the
+    // lines into a vertical wxBoxSizer
+    wxSizer *CreateTextSizer( const wxString &message );
+#endif // wxUSE_STATTEXT && wxUSE_TEXTCTRL
+    
+#if wxUSE_BUTTON
+    // places buttons into a horizontal wxBoxSizer
+    wxSizer *CreateButtonSizer( long flags );
+#endif // wxUSE_BUTTON
+
+protected:
+    // the return code from modal dialog
+    int m_returnCode;
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/dialog.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dialog.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dialog.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/dialog.h"
+// FIXME_MGL -- belongs to wxUniv
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/dialog.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dialog.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dialog.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/dialog.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_

include/wx/dirdlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_DIRDLG
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxDirDialogNameStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxDirDialogDefaultFolderStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxEmptyString;
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WIN16__) || (defined(__GNUWIN32__) && !wxUSE_NORLANDER_HEADERS) || defined(__SALFORDC__)
+#include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/msw/dirdlg.h"
+#endif
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/dirdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+#include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/mac/dirdlg.h"
+#endif
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dirdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/dirdlg.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DIRDLG
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/dnd.h

@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dnd.h
+// Purpose:     Drag and drop classes declarations
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin, Robert Roebling
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.05.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows Team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DND_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DND_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "dndbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP
+
+#include "wx/dataobj.h"
+#include "wx/cursor.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// result of wxDropSource::DoDragDrop() call
+enum wxDragResult
+{
+    wxDragError,    // error prevented the d&d operation from completing
+    wxDragNone,     // drag target didn't accept the data
+    wxDragCopy,     // the data was successfully copied
+    wxDragMove,     // the data was successfully moved (MSW only)
+    wxDragCancel    // the operation was cancelled by user (not an error)
+};
+
+inline WXDLLEXPORT bool wxIsDragResultOk(wxDragResult res)
+{
+    return res == wxDragCopy || res == wxDragMove;
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDropSource is the object you need to create (and call DoDragDrop on it)
+// to initiate a drag-and-drop operation
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDropSourceBase
+{
+public:
+    wxDropSourceBase(const wxCursor &cursorCopy = wxNullCursor,
+                     const wxCursor &cursorMove = wxNullCursor,
+                     const wxCursor &cursorStop = wxNullCursor)
+        : m_cursorCopy(cursorCopy),
+          m_cursorMove(cursorMove),
+          m_cursorStop(cursorStop)
+        { m_data = (wxDataObject *)NULL; }
+    virtual ~wxDropSourceBase() { }
+
+    // set the data which is transfered by drag and drop
+    void SetData(wxDataObject& data)
+      { m_data = &data; }
+
+    wxDataObject *GetDataObject()
+      { return m_data; }
+
+    // set the icon corresponding to given drag result
+    void SetCursor(wxDragResult res, const wxCursor& cursor)
+    {
+        if ( res == wxDragCopy )
+            m_cursorCopy = cursor;
+        else if ( res == wxDragMove )
+            m_cursorMove = cursor;
+        else
+            m_cursorStop = cursor;
+    }
+
+    // start drag action, see enum wxDragResult for return value description
+    //
+    // if bAllowMove is TRUE, data can be moved, if not - only copied
+    virtual wxDragResult DoDragDrop(bool bAllowMove = FALSE) = 0;
+
+    // override to give feedback depending on the current operation result
+    // "effect" and return TRUE if you did something, FALSE to let the library
+    // give the default feedback
+    virtual bool GiveFeedback(wxDragResult WXUNUSED(effect)) { return FALSE; }
+
+protected:
+    const wxCursor& GetCursor(wxDragResult res) const
+    {
+        if ( res == wxDragCopy )
+            return m_cursorCopy;
+        else if ( res == wxDragMove )
+            return m_cursorMove;
+        else
+            return m_cursorStop;
+    }
+
+    wxDataObject *m_data;
+
+    // the cursors to use for feedback
+    wxCursor      m_cursorCopy, m_cursorMove, m_cursorStop;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDropTarget should be associated with a window if it wants to be able to
+// receive data via drag and drop.
+//
+// To use this class, you should derive from wxDropTarget and implement
+// OnData() pure virtual method. You may also wish to override OnDrop() if you
+// want to accept the data only inside some region of the window (this may
+// avoid having to copy the data to this application which happens only when
+// OnData() is called)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDropTargetBase
+{
+public:
+    // ctor takes a pointer to heap-allocated wxDataObject which will be owned
+    // by wxDropTarget and deleted by it automatically. If you don't give it
+    // here, you can use SetDataObject() later.
+    wxDropTargetBase(wxDataObject *dataObject = (wxDataObject*)NULL)
+        { m_dataObject = dataObject; }
+    // dtor deletes our data object
+    virtual ~wxDropTargetBase()
+        { delete m_dataObject; }
+
+    // get/set the associated wxDataObject
+    wxDataObject *GetDataObject() const
+        { return m_dataObject; }
+    void SetDataObject(wxDataObject *dataObject)
+        { if (m_dataObject) delete m_dataObject;
+    m_dataObject = dataObject; }
+
+    // these functions are called when data is moved over position (x, y) and
+    // may return either wxDragCopy, wxDragMove or wxDragNone depending on
+    // what would happen if the data were dropped here.
+    //
+    // the last parameter is what would happen by default and is determined by
+    // the platform-specific logic (for example, under Windows it's wxDragCopy
+    // if Ctrl key is pressed and wxDragMove otherwise) except that it will
+    // always be wxDragNone if the carried data is in an unsupported format.
+
+    // called when the mouse enters the window (only once until OnLeave())
+    virtual wxDragResult OnEnter(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def)
+        { return OnDragOver(x, y, def); }
+
+    // called when the mouse moves in the window - shouldn't take long to
+    // execute or otherwise mouse movement would be too slow
+    virtual wxDragResult OnDragOver(wxCoord WXUNUSED(x), wxCoord WXUNUSED(y),
+                                    wxDragResult def)
+        { return def; }
+
+    // called when mouse leaves the window: might be used to remove the
+    // feedback which was given in OnEnter()
+    virtual void OnLeave() { }
+
+    // this function is called when data is dropped at position (x, y) - if it
+    // returns TRUE, OnData() will be called immediately afterwards which will
+    // allow to retrieve the data dropped.
+    virtual bool OnDrop(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    // called after OnDrop() returns TRUE: you will usually just call
+    // GetData() from here and, probably, also refresh something to update the
+    // new data and, finally, return the code indicating how did the operation
+    // complete (returning default value in case of success and wxDragError on
+    // failure is usually ok)
+    virtual wxDragResult OnData(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def) = 0;
+
+    // may be called *only* from inside OnData() and will fill m_dataObject
+    // with the data from the drop source if it returns TRUE
+    virtual bool GetData() = 0;
+
+protected:
+    wxDataObject *m_dataObject;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform dependent class declarations
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dropsrc.h"
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/droptgt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/dnd.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// standard wxDropTarget implementations (implemented in common/dobjcmn.cpp)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// A simple wxDropTarget derived class for text data: you only need to
+// override OnDropText() to get something working
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextDropTarget : public wxDropTarget
+{
+public:
+    wxTextDropTarget();
+
+    virtual bool OnDropText(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, const wxString& text) = 0;
+
+    virtual wxDragResult OnData(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def);
+};
+
+// A drop target which accepts files (dragged from File Manager or Explorer)
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileDropTarget : public wxDropTarget
+{
+public:
+    wxFileDropTarget();
+
+    // parameters are the number of files and the array of file names
+    virtual bool OnDropFiles(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                             const wxArrayString& filenames) = 0;
+
+    virtual wxDragResult OnData(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def);
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP
+
+#endif // _WX_DND_H_BASE_

include/wx/dragimag.h

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DRAGIMAG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DRAGIMAG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_DRAGIMAGE
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#ifdef __WIN16__
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#else
+#include "wx/msw/dragimag.h"
+#endif
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DRAGIMAGE
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DRAGIMAG_H_BASE_

include/wx/filedlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+#ifndef _WX_FILEDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_FILEDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_FILEDLG
+
+enum
+{
+    wxOPEN              = 0x0001,
+    wxSAVE              = 0x0002,
+    wxOVERWRITE_PROMPT  = 0x0004,
+    wxHIDE_READONLY     = 0x0008,
+    wxFILE_MUST_EXIST   = 0x0010,
+    wxMULTIPLE          = 0x0020,
+    wxCHANGE_DIR        = 0x0040
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/filedlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/filedlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/filedlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/filedlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+#include "wx/generic/filedlgg.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/mac/filedlg.h"
+#endif
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/filedlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/filedlg.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FILEDLG
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_FILEDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/font.h

@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/font.h
+// Purpose:     wxFontBase class: the interface of wxFont
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     20.09.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FONT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_FONT_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "fontbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"        // for wxDEFAULT &c
+#include "wx/fontenc.h"     // the font encoding constants
+#include "wx/gdiobj.h"      // the base class
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// forward declarations
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontData;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontBase;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFont;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// font constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// standard font families
+enum wxFontFamily
+{
+    wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT = wxDEFAULT,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE = wxDECORATIVE,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN = wxROMAN,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT = wxSCRIPT,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS = wxSWISS,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN = wxMODERN,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE = wxTELETYPE,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_MAX
+};
+
+// font styles
+enum wxFontStyle
+{
+    wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL = wxNORMAL,
+    wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC = wxITALIC,
+    wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT = wxSLANT,
+    wxFONTSTYLE_MAX
+};
+
+// font weights
+enum wxFontWeight
+{
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL = wxNORMAL,
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT = wxLIGHT,
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD = wxBOLD,
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_MAX
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFontBase represents a font object
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontRefData;
+struct WXDLLEXPORT wxNativeFontInfo;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontBase : public wxGDIObject
+{
+public:
+    // creator function
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    virtual ~wxFontBase() { }
+#endif
+
+    // from the font components
+    static wxFont *New(
+        int pointSize,              // size of the font in points
+        int family,                 // see wxFontFamily enum
+        int style,                  // see wxFontStyle enum
+        int weight,                 // see wxFontWeight enum
+        bool underlined = FALSE,    // not underlined by default
+        const wxString& face = wxEmptyString,              // facename
+        wxFontEncoding encoding = wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT); // ISO8859-X, ...
+
+    // from the (opaque) native font description object
+    static wxFont *New(const wxNativeFontInfo& nativeFontDesc);
+
+    // from the string representation of wxNativeFontInfo
+    static wxFont *New(const wxString& strNativeFontDesc);
+
+    // was the font successfully created?
+    bool Ok() const { return m_refData != NULL; }
+
+    // comparison
+    bool operator == (const wxFont& font) const;
+    bool operator != (const wxFont& font) const;
+
+    // accessors: get the font characteristics
+    virtual int GetPointSize() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetFamily() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetStyle() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetWeight() const = 0;
+    virtual bool GetUnderlined() const = 0;
+    virtual wxString GetFaceName() const = 0;
+    virtual wxFontEncoding GetEncoding() const = 0;
+    virtual wxNativeFontInfo *GetNativeFontInfo() const;
+    wxString GetNativeFontInfoDesc() const;
+
+    // change the font characteristics
+    virtual void SetPointSize( int pointSize ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetFamily( int family ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetStyle( int style ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetWeight( int weight ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetFaceName( const wxString& faceName ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetUnderlined( bool underlined ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding) = 0;
+    virtual void SetNativeFontInfo(const wxNativeFontInfo& info);
+
+    // VZ: there is no void SetNativeFontInfo(const wxString& info), needed?
+
+    // translate the fonts into human-readable string (i.e. GetStyleString()
+    // will return "wxITALIC" for an italic font, ...)
+    wxString GetFamilyString() const;
+    wxString GetStyleString() const;
+    wxString GetWeightString() const;
+
+    // the default encoding is used for creating all fonts with default
+    // encoding parameter
+    static wxFontEncoding GetDefaultEncoding()
+        { return ms_encodingDefault; }
+    static void SetDefaultEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding)
+        { ms_encodingDefault = encoding; }
+
+protected:
+    // get the internal data
+    wxFontRefData *GetFontData() const
+        { return (wxFontRefData *)m_refData; }
+
+private:
+    // the currently default encoding: by default, it's the default system
+    // encoding, but may be changed by the application using
+    // SetDefaultEncoding() to make all subsequent fonts created without
+    // specifing encoding parameter using this encoding
+    static wxFontEncoding ms_encodingDefault;
+};
+
+// include the real class declaration
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/font.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// macros
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define M_FONTDATA GetFontData()
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_FONT_H_BASE_

include/wx/gauge.h

@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/gauge.h
+// Purpose:     wxGauge interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     20.02.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996-2001 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_GAUGE_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_GAUGE_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma implementation "gaugebase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_GAUGE
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxGaugeNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxGauge: a progress bar
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxGaugeBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    virtual ~wxGaugeBase() { }
+#endif
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                wxWindowID id,
+                int range,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                long style = wxGA_HORIZONTAL,
+                const wxValidator& validator = wxDefaultValidator,
+                const wxString& name = wxGaugeNameStr);
+
+    // set/get the control range
+    virtual void SetRange(int range);
+    virtual int GetRange() const;
+
+    // position
+    virtual void SetValue(int pos);
+    virtual int GetValue() const;
+
+    // appearance params (not implemented for most ports)
+
+    virtual void SetShadowWidth(int w);
+    virtual int GetShadowWidth() const;
+
+    virtual void SetBezelFace(int w);
+    virtual int GetBezelFace() const;
+
+    // overriden base class virtuals
+    virtual bool AcceptsFocus() const { return FALSE; }
+
+protected:
+    // the max position
+    int m_rangeMax;
+
+    // the current position
+    int m_gaugePos;
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #ifdef __WIN95__
+        #include "wx/msw/gauge95.h"
+        #define wxGauge wxGauge95
+        #define sm_classwxGauge sm_classwxGauge95
+    #else // !__WIN95__
+        #include "wx/msw/gaugemsw.h"
+        #define wxGauge wxGaugeMSW
+        #define sm_classwxGauge sm_classwxGaugeMSW
+    #endif
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/gauge.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GAUGE
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_GAUGE_H_BASE_

include/wx/gdiobj.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_GDIOBJ_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_GDIOBJ_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/gdiobj.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_GDIOBJ_H_BASE_

include/wx/glcanvas.h

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#ifndef _WX_GLCANVAS_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_GLCANVAS_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/glcanvas.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/glcanvas.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/glcanvas.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/glcanvas.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/glcanvas.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/glcanvas.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/glcanvas.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_GLCANVAS_H_BASE_

include/wx/html/forcelnk.h

@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        forcelnk.h
-// Purpose:     see bellow
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-/*
-
-DESCRPITON:
-
-mod_*.cpp files contain handlers for tags. These files are modules - they contain
-one wxTagModule class and it's OnInit() method is called from wxApp's init method.
-The module is called even if you only link it into the executable, so everything
-seems wonderful.
-
-The problem is that we have these modules in LIBRARY and mod_*.cpp files contain
-no method nor class which is known out of the module. So the linker won't
-link these .o/.obj files into executable because it detected that it is not used
-by the program.
-
-To workaround this I introduced set of macros FORCE_LINK_ME and FORCE_LINK. These
-macros are generic and are not limited to mod_*.cpp files. You may find them quite
-useful somewhere else...
-
-How to use them:
-let's suppose you want to always link file foo.cpp and that you have module
-always.cpp that is certainly always linked (e.g. the one with main() function
-or htmlwin.cpp in wxHtml library).
-
-Place FORCE_LINK_ME(foo) somewhere in foo.cpp and FORCE_LINK(foo) somewhere
-in always.cpp
-See mod_*.cpp and htmlwin.cpp for example :-)
-
-*/
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_FORCELNK_H_
-#define _WX_FORCELNK_H_
-
-
-
-// This must be part of the module you want to force:
-#define FORCE_LINK_ME(module_name)                                    \
-                int _link_dummy_func_##module_name ();                \
-                int _link_dummy_func_##module_name ()                 \
-                {                                                     \
-                    return 1;                                         \
-                }
-
-
-// And this must be somewhere where it certainly will be linked:
-#define FORCE_LINK(module_name)                                       \
-                extern int _link_dummy_func_##module_name ();         \
-                static int _link_dummy_var_##module_name =            \
-                               _link_dummy_func_##module_name ();
-
-#define FORCE_WXHTML_MODULES() \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_layout) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_fonts) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_image) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_list) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_dflist) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_pre) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_hline) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_links) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_tables) \
-    FORCE_LINK(m_style)
-
-
-#endif // _WX_FORCELNK_H_

include/wx/html/helpctrl.h

@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        helpctrl.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlHelpController
-// Notes:       Based on htmlhelp.cpp, implementing a monolithic
-//              HTML Help controller class,  by Vaclav Slavik
-// Author:      Harm van der Heijden and Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) Harm van der Heijden and Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-#ifndef _WX_HELPCTRL_H_
-#define _WX_HELPCTRL_H_
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "helpctrl.h"
-#endif
-
-#if wxUSE_WXHTML_HELP
-
-#include "wx/html/helpfrm.h"
-#include "wx/helpbase.h"
-
-#define wxID_HTML_HELPFRAME   (wxID_HIGHEST + 1)
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlHelpController : public wxHelpControllerBase // wxEvtHandler
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlHelpController)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlHelpController(int style = wxHF_DEFAULT_STYLE);
-    virtual ~wxHtmlHelpController();
-
-    void SetTitleFormat(const wxString& format);
-    void SetTempDir(const wxString& path) { m_helpData.SetTempDir(path); }
-    bool AddBook(const wxString& book_url, bool show_wait_msg = FALSE);
-    bool AddBook(const wxFileName& book_file, bool show_wait_msg = FALSE);
-
-    bool Display(const wxString& x);
-    bool Display(int id);
-    bool DisplayContents();
-    bool DisplayIndex();
-    bool KeywordSearch(const wxString& keyword);
-
-    wxHtmlHelpFrame* GetFrame() { return m_helpFrame; }
-    void UseConfig(wxConfigBase *config, const wxString& rootpath = wxEmptyString);
-
-    // Assigns config object to the Ctrl. This config is then
-    // used in subsequent calls to Read/WriteCustomization of both help
-    // Ctrl and it's wxHtmlWindow
-    virtual void ReadCustomization(wxConfigBase *cfg, const wxString& path = wxEmptyString);
-    virtual void WriteCustomization(wxConfigBase *cfg, const wxString& path = wxEmptyString);
-
-    //// Backward compatibility with wxHelpController API
-
-    virtual bool Initialize(const wxString& file, int WXUNUSED(server) ) { return Initialize(file); }
-    virtual bool Initialize(const wxString& file);
-    virtual void SetViewer(const wxString& WXUNUSED(viewer), long WXUNUSED(flags) = 0) {}
-    virtual bool LoadFile(const wxString& file = wxT(""));
-    virtual bool DisplaySection(int sectionNo);
-    virtual bool DisplaySection(const wxString& section) { return Display(section); }
-    virtual bool DisplayBlock(long blockNo) { return DisplaySection(blockNo); }
-    virtual bool DisplayTextPopup(const wxString& text, const wxPoint& pos);
-
-    virtual void SetFrameParameters(const wxString& title,
-                               const wxSize& size,
-                               const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
-                               bool newFrameEachTime = FALSE);
-    /// Obtains the latest settings used by the help frame and the help
-    /// frame.
-    virtual wxFrame *GetFrameParameters(wxSize *size = NULL,
-                               wxPoint *pos = NULL,
-                               bool *newFrameEachTime = NULL);
-
-    // Get direct access to help data:
-    wxHtmlHelpData *GetHelpData() { return &m_helpData; }
-
-    virtual bool Quit() ;
-    virtual void OnQuit() {};
-
-    void OnCloseFrame(wxCloseEvent& evt);
-
-    // Make the help controller's frame 'modal' if
-    // needed
-    void AddGrabIfNeeded();
-
-protected:
-    virtual wxHtmlHelpFrame* CreateHelpFrame(wxHtmlHelpData *data);
-
-    virtual void CreateHelpWindow();
-    virtual void DestroyHelpWindow();
-
-    wxHtmlHelpData      m_helpData;
-    wxHtmlHelpFrame*    m_helpFrame;
-    wxConfigBase *      m_Config;
-    wxString            m_ConfigRoot;
-    wxString            m_titleFormat;
-    int                 m_FrameStyle;
-    // DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlHelpController)
-};
-
-#endif // wxUSE_WXHTML_HELP
-
-#endif // _WX_HELPCTRL_H_

include/wx/html/helpdata.h

@@ -1,218 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        helpdata.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlHelpData
-// Notes:       Based on htmlhelp.cpp, implementing a monolithic
-//              HTML Help controller class,  by Vaclav Slavik
-// Author:      Harm van der Heijden and Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) Harm van der Heijden and Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-#ifndef _WX_HELPDATA_H_
-#define _WX_HELPDATA_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "helpdata.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/object.h"
-#include "wx/string.h"
-#include "wx/filesys.h"
-#include "wx/dynarray.h"
-#include "wx/font.h"
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlHelpData;
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// helper classes & structs
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlBookRecord
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlBookRecord(const wxString& bookfile, const wxString& basepath, 
-                     const wxString& title, const wxString& start)
-    {
-        m_BookFile = bookfile;
-        m_BasePath = basepath;
-        m_Title = title;
-        m_Start = start;
-        // for debugging, give the contents index obvious default values
-        m_ContentsStart = m_ContentsEnd = -1;
-    }
-    wxString GetBookFile() const { return m_BookFile; }
-    wxString GetTitle() const { return m_Title; }
-    wxString GetStart() const { return m_Start; }
-    wxString GetBasePath() const { return m_BasePath; }
-    /* SetContentsRange: store in the bookrecord where in the index/contents lists the
-     * book's records are stored. This to facilitate searching in a specific book.
-     * This code will have to be revised when loading/removing books becomes dynamic.
-     * (as opposed to appending only)
-     * Note that storing index range is pointless, because the index is alphab. sorted. */
-    void SetContentsRange(int start, int end) { m_ContentsStart = start; m_ContentsEnd = end; }
-    int GetContentsStart() const { return m_ContentsStart; }
-    int GetContentsEnd() const { return m_ContentsEnd; }
-
-    void SetTitle(const wxString& title) { m_Title = title; }
-    void SetBasePath(const wxString& path) { m_BasePath = path; }
-    void SetStart(const wxString& start) { m_Start = start; }
-
-    // returns full filename of page (which is part of the book), 
-    // i.e. with book's basePath prepended. If page is already absolute 
-    // path, basePath is _not_ prepended.
-    wxString GetFullPath(const wxString &page) const;
-
-protected:
-    wxString m_BookFile;
-    wxString m_BasePath;
-    wxString m_Title;
-    wxString m_Start;
-    int m_ContentsStart;
-    int m_ContentsEnd;
-};
-
-
-WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(wxHtmlBookRecord, wxHtmlBookRecArray);
-
-
-struct wxHtmlContentsItem
-{
-    short int m_Level;
-    int m_ID;
-    wxChar* m_Name;
-    wxChar* m_Page;
-    wxHtmlBookRecord *m_Book;
-    
-    // returns full filename of m_Page, i.e. with book's basePath prepended
-    wxString GetFullPath() const { return m_Book->GetFullPath(m_Page); }
-};
-
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlSearchEngine
-//                  This class takes input streams and scans them for occurence
-//                  of keyword(s)
-//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlSearchEngine : public wxObject
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlSearchEngine() : wxObject() {m_Keyword = NULL; }
-    ~wxHtmlSearchEngine() {if (m_Keyword) delete[] m_Keyword; }
-
-    // Sets the keyword we will be searching for
-    virtual void LookFor(const wxString& keyword, bool case_sensitive, bool whole_words_only);
-
-    // Scans the stream for the keyword.
-    // Returns TRUE if the stream contains keyword, fALSE otherwise
-    virtual bool Scan(const wxFSFile& file);
-
-private:
-    wxChar *m_Keyword;
-    bool m_CaseSensitive;
-    bool m_WholeWords;
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlSearchEngine)
-};
-
-
-// State information of a search action. I'd have prefered to make this a nested
-// class inside wxHtmlHelpData, but that's against coding standards :-(
-// Never construct this class yourself, obtain a copy from
-// wxHtmlHelpData::PrepareKeywordSearch(const wxString& key)
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlSearchStatus
-{
-public:
-    // constructor; supply wxHtmlHelpData ptr, the keyword and (optionally) the
-    // title of the book to search. By default, all books are searched.
-    wxHtmlSearchStatus(wxHtmlHelpData* base, const wxString& keyword,
-                       bool case_sensitive, bool whole_words_only,
-                       const wxString& book = wxEmptyString);
-    bool Search();  // do the next iteration
-    bool IsActive() { return m_Active; }
-    int GetCurIndex() { return m_CurIndex; }
-    int GetMaxIndex() { return m_MaxIndex; }
-    const wxString& GetName() { return m_Name; }
-    wxHtmlContentsItem* GetContentsItem() { return m_ContentsItem; }
-
-private:
-    wxHtmlHelpData* m_Data;
-    wxHtmlSearchEngine m_Engine;
-    wxString m_Keyword, m_Name;
-    wxChar *m_LastPage;
-    wxHtmlContentsItem* m_ContentsItem;
-    bool m_Active;   // search is not finished
-    int m_CurIndex;  // where we are now
-    int m_MaxIndex;  // number of files we search
-    // For progress bar: 100*curindex/maxindex = % complete
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlSearchStatus)
-};
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlHelpData : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlHelpData)
-    friend class wxHtmlSearchStatus;
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlHelpData();
-    ~wxHtmlHelpData();
-
-    // Sets directory where temporary files are stored.
-    // These temp files are index & contents file in binary (much faster to read)
-    // form. These files are NOT deleted on program's exit.
-    void SetTempDir(const wxString& path);
-
-    // Adds new book. 'book' is location of .htb file (stands for "html book").
-    // See documentation for details on its format.
-    // Returns success.
-    bool AddBook(const wxString& book);
-    bool AddBookParam(const wxFSFile& bookfile,
-                      wxFontEncoding encoding,
-                      const wxString& title, const wxString& contfile,
-                      const wxString& indexfile = wxEmptyString,
-                      const wxString& deftopic = wxEmptyString,
-                      const wxString& path = wxEmptyString);
-
-    // Some accessing stuff:
-
-    // returns URL of page on basis of (file)name
-    wxString FindPageByName(const wxString& page);
-    // returns URL of page on basis of MS id
-    wxString FindPageById(int id);
-
-    const wxHtmlBookRecArray& GetBookRecArray() { return m_BookRecords; }
-    wxHtmlContentsItem* GetContents() { return m_Contents; }
-    int GetContentsCnt() { return m_ContentsCnt; }
-    wxHtmlContentsItem* GetIndex() { return m_Index; }
-    int GetIndexCnt() { return m_IndexCnt; }
-
-protected:
-    wxString m_TempPath;
-
-    wxHtmlBookRecArray m_BookRecords;
-    // each book has one record in this array:
-    wxHtmlContentsItem* m_Contents;
-    int m_ContentsCnt;   
-    wxHtmlContentsItem* m_Index; // list of all available books and pages.
-    int m_IndexCnt;  // list of index items
-
-protected:
-    // Imports .hhp files (MS HTML Help Workshop)
-    bool LoadMSProject(wxHtmlBookRecord *book, wxFileSystem& fsys,
-                       const wxString& indexfile, const wxString& contentsfile);
-    // Reads binary book
-    bool LoadCachedBook(wxHtmlBookRecord *book, wxInputStream *f);
-    // Writes binary book
-    bool SaveCachedBook(wxHtmlBookRecord *book, wxOutputStream *f);
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlHelpData)
-};
-
-#endif
-
-#endif

include/wx/html/helpfrm.h

@@ -1,239 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        helpfrm.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlHelpFrame
-// Notes:       Based on htmlhelp.cpp, implementing a monolithic
-//              HTML Help controller class,  by Vaclav Slavik
-// Author:      Harm van der Heijden and Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) Harm van der Heijden and Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-#ifndef _WX_HELPFRM_H_
-#define _WX_HELPFRM_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "helpfrm.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_WXHTML_HELP
-
-#include "wx/html/helpdata.h"
-#include "wx/window.h"
-#include "wx/frame.h"
-#include "wx/config.h"
-#include "wx/splitter.h"
-#include "wx/notebook.h"
-#include "wx/listbox.h"
-#include "wx/choice.h"
-#include "wx/combobox.h"
-#include "wx/checkbox.h"
-#include "wx/stattext.h"
-#include "wx/html/htmlwin.h"
-#include "wx/html/htmprint.h"
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxButton;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextCtrl;
-
-
-// style flags for the Help Frame
-#define wxHF_TOOLBAR                0x0001
-#define wxHF_CONTENTS               0x0002
-#define wxHF_INDEX                  0x0004
-#define wxHF_SEARCH                 0x0008
-#define wxHF_BOOKMARKS              0x0010
-#define wxHF_OPEN_FILES             0x0020
-#define wxHF_PRINT                  0x0040
-#define wxHF_FLAT_TOOLBAR           0x0080
-#define wxHF_MERGE_BOOKS            0x0100
-#define wxHF_ICONS_BOOK             0x0200
-#define wxHF_ICONS_BOOK_CHAPTER     0x0400
-#define wxHF_ICONS_FOLDER           0x0000 // this is 0 since it is default
-#define wxHF_DEFAULT_STYLE          (wxHF_TOOLBAR | wxHF_CONTENTS | \
-                                     wxHF_INDEX | wxHF_SEARCH | \
-                                     wxHF_BOOKMARKS | wxHF_PRINT)
-//compatibility:
-#define wxHF_OPENFILES               wxHF_OPEN_FILES
-#define wxHF_FLATTOOLBAR             wxHF_FLAT_TOOLBAR
-#define wxHF_DEFAULTSTYLE            wxHF_DEFAULT_STYLE
-
-
-struct wxHtmlHelpFrameCfg
-{
-    int x, y, w, h;
-    long sashpos;
-    bool navig_on;
-};
-
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHelpControllerBase;
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlHelpFrame : public wxFrame
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlHelpFrame)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlHelpFrame(wxHtmlHelpData* data = NULL) { Init(data); }
-    wxHtmlHelpFrame(wxWindow* parent, wxWindowID wxWindowID,
-                    const wxString& title = wxEmptyString,
-                    int style = wxHF_DEFAULT_STYLE, wxHtmlHelpData* data = NULL);
-    bool Create(wxWindow* parent, wxWindowID id, const wxString& title = wxEmptyString,
-                int style = wxHF_DEFAULT_STYLE);
-    ~wxHtmlHelpFrame();
-
-    wxHtmlHelpData* GetData() { return m_Data; }
-    wxHelpControllerBase* GetController() const { return m_helpController; }
-    void SetController(wxHelpControllerBase* controller) { m_helpController = controller; }
-
-    // Sets format of title of the frame. Must contain exactly one "%s"
-    // (for title of displayed HTML page)
-    void SetTitleFormat(const wxString& format);
-
-    // Displays page x. If not found it will offect the user a choice of
-    // searching books.
-    // Looking for the page runs in these steps:
-    // 1. try to locate file named x (if x is for example "doc/howto.htm")
-    // 2. try to open starting page of book x
-    // 3. try to find x in contents (if x is for example "How To ...")
-    // 4. try to find x in index (if x is for example "How To ...")
-    bool Display(const wxString& x);
-
-    // Alternative version that works with numeric ID.
-    // (uses extension to MS format, <param name="ID" value=id>, see docs)
-    bool Display(const int id);
-
-    // Displays help window and focuses contents.
-    bool DisplayContents();
-
-    // Displays help window and focuses index.
-    bool DisplayIndex();
-
-    // Searches for keyword. Returns TRUE and display page if found, return
-    // FALSE otherwise
-    // Syntax of keyword is Altavista-like:
-    // * words are separated by spaces
-    //   (but "\"hello world\"" is only one world "hello world")
-    // * word may be pretended by + or -
-    //   (+ : page must contain the word ; - : page can't contain the word)
-    // * if there is no + or - before the word, + is default
-    bool KeywordSearch(const wxString& keyword);
-
-    void UseConfig(wxConfigBase *config, const wxString& rootpath = wxEmptyString)
-        {
-            m_Config = config;
-            m_ConfigRoot = rootpath;
-            ReadCustomization(config, rootpath);
-        }
-
-    // Saves custom settings into cfg config. it will use the path 'path'
-    // if given, otherwise it will save info into currently selected path.
-    // saved values : things set by SetFonts, SetBorders.
-    void ReadCustomization(wxConfigBase *cfg, const wxString& path = wxEmptyString);
-    void WriteCustomization(wxConfigBase *cfg, const wxString& path = wxEmptyString);
-
-    // call this to let wxHtmlHelpFrame know page changed
-    void NotifyPageChanged();
-    
-    // Refreshes Contents and Index tabs
-    void RefreshLists();
-    
-protected:
-    void Init(wxHtmlHelpData* data = NULL);
-
-    // Adds items to m_Contents tree control
-    void CreateContents();
-
-    // Adds items to m_IndexList
-    void CreateIndex();
-
-    // Add books to search choice panel
-    void CreateSearch();
-
-    // Add custom buttons to toolbar
-    virtual void AddToolbarButtons(wxToolBar *toolBar, int style);
-
-    // Displays options dialog (fonts etc.)
-    virtual void OptionsDialog();
-
-    void OnToolbar(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnContentsSel(wxTreeEvent& event);
-    void OnIndexSel(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnIndexFind(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnIndexAll(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnSearchSel(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnSearch(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnBookmarksSel(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnCloseWindow(wxCloseEvent& event);
-    void OnActivate(wxActivateEvent& event);
-
-#ifdef __WXMAC__
-    void OnClose(wxCommandEvent& event);
-    void OnAbout(wxCommandEvent& event);
-#endif
-
-    // Images:
-    enum {
-        IMG_Book = 0,
-        IMG_Folder,
-        IMG_Page
-    };
-
-protected:
-    wxHtmlHelpData* m_Data;
-    bool m_DataCreated;  // m_Data created by frame, or supplied?
-    wxString m_TitleFormat;  // title of the help frame
-    // below are various pointers to GUI components
-    wxHtmlWindow *m_HtmlWin;
-    wxSplitterWindow *m_Splitter;
-    wxPanel *m_NavigPan;
-    wxNotebook *m_NavigNotebook;
-    wxTreeCtrl *m_ContentsBox;
-    wxTextCtrl *m_IndexText;
-    wxButton *m_IndexButton;
-    wxButton *m_IndexButtonAll;
-    wxListBox *m_IndexList;
-    wxTextCtrl *m_SearchText;
-    wxButton *m_SearchButton;
-    wxListBox *m_SearchList;
-    wxChoice *m_SearchChoice;
-    wxStaticText *m_IndexCountInfo;
-    wxCheckBox *m_SearchCaseSensitive;
-    wxCheckBox *m_SearchWholeWords;
-
-    wxComboBox *m_Bookmarks;
-    wxArrayString m_BookmarksNames, m_BookmarksPages;
-
-    wxHtmlHelpFrameCfg m_Cfg;
-
-    wxConfigBase *m_Config;
-    wxString m_ConfigRoot;
-
-    // pagenumbers of controls in notebook (usually 0,1,2)
-    int m_ContentsPage;
-    int m_IndexPage;
-    int m_SearchPage;
-
-    // lists of available fonts (used in options dialog)
-    wxArrayString *m_NormalFonts, *m_FixedFonts;
-    int m_FontSize; // 0,1,2 = small,medium,big
-    wxString m_NormalFace, m_FixedFace;
-
-    bool m_UpdateContents;
-
-#if wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
-    wxHtmlEasyPrinting *m_Printer;
-#endif
-    wxHashTable *m_PagesHash;
-    wxHelpControllerBase* m_helpController;
-
-    int m_hfStyle;
-
-    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlHelpFrame)
-};
-
-#endif // wxUSE_WXHTML_HELP
-
-#endif

include/wx/html/htmlcell.h

@@ -1,382 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmlcell.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlCell class is used by wxHtmlWindow/wxHtmlWinParser
-//              as a basic visual element of HTML page
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMLCELL_H_
-#define _WX_HTMLCELL_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "htmlcell.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/html/htmltag.h"
-#include "wx/html/htmldefs.h"
-#include "wx/window.h"
-
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlLinkInfo;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlCell;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlContainerCell;
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlCell
-//                  Internal data structure. It represents fragments of parsed HTML
-//                  page - a word, picture, table, horizontal line and so on.
-//                  It is used by wxHtmlWindow to represent HTML page in memory.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlCell : public wxObject
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlCell();
-    virtual ~wxHtmlCell();
-
-    void SetParent(wxHtmlContainerCell *p) {m_Parent = p;}
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *GetParent() const {return m_Parent;}
-
-    int GetPosX() const {return m_PosX;}
-    int GetPosY() const {return m_PosY;}
-    int GetWidth() const {return m_Width;}
-    int GetHeight() const {return m_Height;}
-    int GetDescent() const {return m_Descent;}
-
-    const wxString& GetId() const { return m_id; }
-    void SetId(const wxString& id) { m_id = id; }
-
-    // returns the link associated with this cell. The position is position within
-    // the cell so it varies from 0 to m_Width, from 0 to m_Height
-    virtual wxHtmlLinkInfo* GetLink(int WXUNUSED(x) = 0, int WXUNUSED(y) = 0) const
-        { return m_Link; }
-
-    // members access methods
-    wxHtmlCell *GetNext() const {return m_Next;}
-
-    // members writing methods
-    virtual void SetPos(int x, int y) {m_PosX = x, m_PosY = y;}
-    void SetLink(const wxHtmlLinkInfo& link);
-    void SetNext(wxHtmlCell *cell) {m_Next = cell;}
-
-    // 1. adjust cell's width according to the fact that maximal possible width is w.
-    //    (this has sense when working with horizontal lines, tables etc.)
-    // 2. prepare layout (=fill-in m_PosX, m_PosY (and sometime m_Height) members)
-    //    = place items to fit window, according to the width w
-    virtual void Layout(int w);
-
-    // renders the cell
-    virtual void Draw(wxDC& WXUNUSED(dc), int WXUNUSED(x), int WXUNUSED(y), int WXUNUSED(view_y1), int WXUNUSED(view_y2)) {}
-
-    // proceed drawing actions in case the cell is not visible (scrolled out of screen).
-    // This is needed to change fonts, colors and so on
-    virtual void DrawInvisible(wxDC& WXUNUSED(dc), int WXUNUSED(x), int WXUNUSED(y)) {}
-
-    // This method returns pointer to the FIRST cell for that
-    // the condition
-    // is true. It first checks if the condition is true for this
-    // cell and then calls m_Next->Find(). (Note: it checks
-    // all subcells if the cell is container)
-    // Condition is unique condition identifier (see htmldefs.h)
-    // (user-defined condition IDs should start from 10000)
-    // and param is optional parameter
-    // Example : m_Cell->Find(wxHTML_COND_ISANCHOR, "news");
-    //   returns pointer to anchor news
-    virtual const wxHtmlCell* Find(int condition, const void* param) const;
-
-    // This function is called when mouse button is clicked over the cell.
-    //
-    // Parent is pointer to wxHtmlWindow that generated the event
-    // HINT: if this handling is not enough for you you should use
-    //       wxHtmlWidgetCell
-    virtual void OnMouseClick(wxWindow *parent, int x, int y, const wxMouseEvent& event);
-
-    // This method used to adjust pagebreak position. The parameter is
-    // variable that contains y-coordinate of page break (= horizontal line that
-    // should not be crossed by words, images etc.). If this cell cannot be divided
-    // into two pieces (each one on another page) then it moves the pagebreak
-    // few pixels up.
-    //
-    // Returned value : true if pagebreak was modified, false otherwise
-    // Usage : while (container->AdjustPagebreak(&p)) {}
-    virtual bool AdjustPagebreak(int *pagebreak, int *known_pagebreaks = NULL, int number_of_pages = 0) const;
-
-    // Sets cell's behaviour on pagebreaks (see AdjustPagebreak). Default
-    // is true - the cell can be split on two pages
-    void SetCanLiveOnPagebreak(bool can) { m_CanLiveOnPagebreak = can; }
-
-    // Returns y-coordinates that contraint the cell, i.e. left is highest
-    // and right lowest coordinate such that the cell lays between then.
-    // Note: this method does not return meaningful values if you haven't
-    //       called Layout() before!
-    virtual void GetHorizontalConstraints(int *left, int *right) const;
-
-    // Returns true for simple == terminal cells, i.e. not composite ones.
-    // This if for internal usage only and may disappear in future versions!
-    virtual bool IsTerminalCell() const { return TRUE; }
-
-    // Find the terminal cell inside this cell at the given position (relative
-    // to this cell)
-    //
-    // Returns NULL if not found
-    virtual wxHtmlCell *FindCellByPos(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) const;
-
-protected:
-    wxHtmlCell *m_Next;
-            // pointer to the next cell
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *m_Parent;
-            // pointer to parent cell
-    long m_Width, m_Height, m_Descent;
-            // dimensions of fragment
-            // m_Descent is used to position text&images..
-    long m_PosX, m_PosY;
-            // position where the fragment is drawn
-    wxHtmlLinkInfo *m_Link;
-            // destination address if this fragment is hypertext link, NULL otherwise
-    bool m_CanLiveOnPagebreak;
-            // true if this cell can be placed on pagebreak, false otherwise
-    wxString m_id;
-            // unique identifier of the cell, generated from "id" property of tags
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlCell)
-};
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// Inherited cells:
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlWordCell
-//                  Single word in input stream.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWordCell : public wxHtmlCell
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlWordCell(const wxString& word, wxDC& dc);
-    void Draw(wxDC& dc, int x, int y, int view_y1, int view_y2);
-
-protected:
-    wxString m_Word;
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlContainerCell
-//                  Container - it contains other cells. Basic of layout algorithm.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlContainerCell : public wxHtmlCell
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlContainerCell(wxHtmlContainerCell *parent);
-    ~wxHtmlContainerCell();
-
-    virtual void Layout(int w);
-    virtual void Draw(wxDC& dc, int x, int y, int view_y1, int view_y2);
-    virtual void DrawInvisible(wxDC& dc, int x, int y);
-    virtual bool AdjustPagebreak(int *pagebreak, int *known_pagebreaks = NULL, int number_of_pages = 0) const;
-
-    // insert cell at the end of m_Cells list
-    void InsertCell(wxHtmlCell *cell);
-
-    // sets horizontal/vertical alignment
-    void SetAlignHor(int al) {m_AlignHor = al; m_LastLayout = -1;}
-    int GetAlignHor() const {return m_AlignHor;}
-    void SetAlignVer(int al) {m_AlignVer = al; m_LastLayout = -1;}
-    int GetAlignVer() const {return m_AlignVer;}
-
-    // sets left-border indentation. units is one of wxHTML_UNITS_* constants
-    // what is combination of wxHTML_INDENT_*
-    void SetIndent(int i, int what, int units = wxHTML_UNITS_PIXELS);
-    // returns the indentation. ind is one of wxHTML_INDENT_* constants
-    int GetIndent(int ind) const;
-    // returns type of value returned by GetIndent(ind)
-    int GetIndentUnits(int ind) const;
-
-    // sets alignment info based on given tag's params
-    void SetAlign(const wxHtmlTag& tag);
-    // sets floating width adjustment
-    // (examples : 32 percent of parent container,
-    // -15 pixels percent (this means 100 % - 15 pixels)
-    void SetWidthFloat(int w, int units) {m_WidthFloat = w; m_WidthFloatUnits = units; m_LastLayout = -1;}
-    void SetWidthFloat(const wxHtmlTag& tag, double pixel_scale = 1.0);
-    // sets minimal height of this container.
-    void SetMinHeight(int h, int align = wxHTML_ALIGN_TOP) {m_MinHeight = h; m_MinHeightAlign = align; m_LastLayout = -1;}
-
-    void SetBackgroundColour(const wxColour& clr) {m_UseBkColour = TRUE; m_BkColour = clr;}
-    // returns background colour (of wxNullColour if none set), so that widgets can
-    // adapt to it:
-    wxColour GetBackgroundColour();
-    void SetBorder(const wxColour& clr1, const wxColour& clr2) {m_UseBorder = TRUE; m_BorderColour1 = clr1, m_BorderColour2 = clr2;}
-    virtual wxHtmlLinkInfo* GetLink(int x = 0, int y = 0) const;
-    virtual const wxHtmlCell* Find(int condition, const void* param) const;
-    virtual void OnMouseClick(wxWindow *parent, int x, int y, const wxMouseEvent& event);
-    virtual void GetHorizontalConstraints(int *left, int *right) const;
-
-    // returns pointer to the first cell in container or NULL
-    wxHtmlCell* GetFirstCell() const {return m_Cells;}
-
-    // see comment in wxHtmlCell about this method
-    virtual bool IsTerminalCell() const { return FALSE; }
-
-    virtual wxHtmlCell *FindCellByPos(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) const;
-
-protected:
-    int m_IndentLeft, m_IndentRight, m_IndentTop, m_IndentBottom;
-            // indentation of subcells. There is always m_Indent pixels
-            // big space between given border of the container and the subcells
-            // it m_Indent < 0 it is in PERCENTS, otherwise it is in pixels
-    int m_MinHeight, m_MinHeightAlign;
-        // minimal height.
-    wxHtmlCell *m_Cells, *m_LastCell;
-            // internal cells, m_Cells points to the first of them, m_LastCell to the last one.
-            // (LastCell is needed only to speed-up InsertCell)
-    int m_AlignHor, m_AlignVer;
-            // alignment horizontal and vertical (left, center, right)
-    int m_WidthFloat, m_WidthFloatUnits;
-            // width float is used in adjustWidth
-    bool m_UseBkColour;
-    wxColour m_BkColour;
-            // background color of this container
-    bool m_UseBorder;
-    wxColour m_BorderColour1, m_BorderColour2;
-            // borders color of this container
-    int m_LastLayout;
-            // if != -1 then call to Layout may be no-op
-            // if previous call to Layout has same argument
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlContainerCell)
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlColourCell
-//                  Color changer.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlColourCell : public wxHtmlCell
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlColourCell(const wxColour& clr, int flags = wxHTML_CLR_FOREGROUND) : wxHtmlCell() {m_Colour = clr; m_Flags = flags;}
-    virtual void Draw(wxDC& dc, int x, int y, int view_y1, int view_y2);
-    virtual void DrawInvisible(wxDC& dc, int x, int y);
-
-protected:
-    wxColour m_Colour;
-    unsigned m_Flags;
-};
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlFontCell
-//                  Sets actual font used for text rendering
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlFontCell : public wxHtmlCell
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlFontCell(wxFont *font) : wxHtmlCell() { m_Font = (*font); }
-    virtual void Draw(wxDC& dc, int x, int y, int view_y1, int view_y2);
-    virtual void DrawInvisible(wxDC& dc, int x, int y);
-
-protected:
-    wxFont m_Font;
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlwidgetCell
-//                  This cell is connected with wxWindow object
-//                  You can use it to insert windows into HTML page
-//                  (buttons, input boxes etc.)
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWidgetCell : public wxHtmlCell
-{
-public:
-    // !!! wnd must have correct parent!
-    // if w != 0 then the m_Wnd has 'floating' width - it adjust
-    // it's width according to parent container's width
-    // (w is percent of parent's width)
-    wxHtmlWidgetCell(wxWindow *wnd, int w = 0);
-    ~wxHtmlWidgetCell() { m_Wnd->Destroy(); }
-    virtual void Draw(wxDC& dc, int x, int y, int view_y1, int view_y2);
-    virtual void DrawInvisible(wxDC& dc, int x, int y);
-    virtual void Layout(int w);
-
-protected:
-    wxWindow* m_Wnd;
-    int m_WidthFloat;
-            // width float is used in adjustWidth (it is in percents)
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlWidgetCell)
-};
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlLinkInfo
-//                  Internal data structure. It represents hypertext link
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlLinkInfo : public wxObject
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlLinkInfo() : wxObject()
-          { m_Href = m_Target = wxEmptyString; m_Event = NULL, m_Cell = NULL; }
-    wxHtmlLinkInfo(const wxString& href, const wxString& target = wxEmptyString) : wxObject()
-          { m_Href = href; m_Target = target; m_Event = NULL, m_Cell = NULL; }
-    wxHtmlLinkInfo(const wxHtmlLinkInfo& l) : wxObject()
-          { m_Href = l.m_Href, m_Target = l.m_Target, m_Event = l.m_Event;
-            m_Cell = l.m_Cell; }
-    wxHtmlLinkInfo& operator=(const wxHtmlLinkInfo& l)
-          { m_Href = l.m_Href, m_Target = l.m_Target, m_Event = l.m_Event;
-            m_Cell = l.m_Cell; return *this; }
-
-    void SetEvent(const wxMouseEvent *e) { m_Event = e; }
-    void SetHtmlCell(const wxHtmlCell *e) { m_Cell = e; }
-
-    wxString GetHref() const { return m_Href; }
-    wxString GetTarget() const { return m_Target; }
-    const wxMouseEvent* GetEvent() const { return m_Event; }
-    const wxHtmlCell* GetHtmlCell() const { return m_Cell; }
-
-private:
-    wxString m_Href, m_Target;
-    const wxMouseEvent *m_Event;
-    const wxHtmlCell *m_Cell;
-};
-
-
-
-
-#endif // wxUSE_HTML
-
-#endif // _WX_HTMLCELL_H_
-

include/wx/html/htmldefs.h

@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmldefs.h
-// Purpose:     constants for wxhtml library
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMLDEFS_H_
-#define _WX_HTMLDEFS_H_
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// ALIGNMENTS
-//                  Describes alignment of text etc. in containers
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-#define wxHTML_ALIGN_LEFT            0x0000
-#define wxHTML_ALIGN_RIGHT           0x0002
-#define wxHTML_ALIGN_JUSTIFY         0x0010
-
-#define wxHTML_ALIGN_TOP             0x0004
-#define wxHTML_ALIGN_BOTTOM          0x0008
-
-#define wxHTML_ALIGN_CENTER          0x0001
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// COLOR MODES
-//                  Used by wxHtmlColourCell to determine clr of what is changing
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-#define wxHTML_CLR_FOREGROUND        0x0001
-#define wxHTML_CLR_BACKGROUND        0x0002
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// UNITS
-//                  Used to specify units
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-#define wxHTML_UNITS_PIXELS          0x0001
-#define wxHTML_UNITS_PERCENT         0x0002
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// INDENTS
-//                  Used to specify indetation relatives
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-#define wxHTML_INDENT_LEFT           0x0010
-#define wxHTML_INDENT_RIGHT          0x0020
-#define wxHTML_INDENT_TOP            0x0040
-#define wxHTML_INDENT_BOTTOM         0x0080
-
-#define wxHTML_INDENT_HORIZONTAL     wxHTML_INDENT_LEFT | wxHTML_INDENT_RIGHT
-#define wxHTML_INDENT_VERTICAL       wxHTML_INDENT_TOP | wxHTML_INDENT_BOTTOM
-#define wxHTML_INDENT_ALL            wxHTML_INDENT_VERTICAL | wxHTML_INDENT_HORIZONTAL
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// FIND CONDITIONS
-//                  Identifiers of wxHtmlCell's Find() conditions
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-#define wxHTML_COND_ISANCHOR              1
-        // Finds the anchor of 'param' name (pointer to wxString).
-    
-#define wxHTML_COND_ISIMAGEMAP            2
-        // Finds imagemap of 'param' name (pointer to wxString).
-    // (used exclusively by m_image.cpp)
-    
-#define wxHTML_COND_USER              10000
-        // User-defined conditions should start from this number
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// INTERNALS
-//                  wxHTML internal constants
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-#define wxHTML_SCROLL_STEP               16
-    /* size of one scroll step of wxHtmlWindow in pixels */
-#define wxHTML_BUFLEN                  1024
-    /* size of temporary buffer used during parsing */
-#define wxHTML_REALLOC_STEP              32
-    /* steps of array reallocation */
-#define wxHTML_PRINT_MAX_PAGES          999
-    /* maximum number of pages printable via html printing */
-
-
-    /* default font sizes */
-#ifdef __WXMSW__
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_1              7
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_2              8
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_3             10
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_4             12
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_5             16
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_6             22
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_7             30
-#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_1              9
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_2             12
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_3             14
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_4             18
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_5             24
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_6             30
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_7             36
-#else
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_1             10
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_2             12
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_3             14
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_4             16
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_5             19
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_6             24
-   #define wxHTML_FONT_SIZE_7             32
-#endif
-
-
-#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
-
-#define HTML_ALIGN_LEFT            wxHTML_ALIGN_LEFT
-#define HTML_ALIGN_RIGHT           wxHTML_ALIGN_RIGHT
-#define HTML_ALIGN_TOP             wxHTML_ALIGN_TOP
-#define HTML_ALIGN_BOTTOM          wxHTML_ALIGN_BOTTOM
-#define HTML_ALIGN_CENTER          wxHTML_ALIGN_CENTER
-#define HTML_CLR_FOREGROUND        wxHTML_CLR_FOREGROUND
-#define HTML_CLR_BACKGROUND        wxHTML_CLR_BACKGROUND
-#define HTML_UNITS_PIXELS          wxHTML_UNITS_PIXELS
-#define HTML_UNITS_PERCENT         wxHTML_UNITS_PERCENT
-#define HTML_INDENT_LEFT           wxHTML_INDENT_LEFT
-#define HTML_INDENT_RIGHT          wxHTML_INDENT_RIGHT
-#define HTML_INDENT_TOP            wxHTML_INDENT_TOP
-#define HTML_INDENT_BOTTOM         wxHTML_INDENT_BOTTOM
-#define HTML_INDENT_HORIZONTAL     wxHTML_INDENT_HORIZONTAL
-#define HTML_INDENT_VERTICAL       wxHTML_INDENT_VERTICAL
-#define HTML_INDENT_ALL            wxHTML_INDENT_ALL
-#define HTML_COND_ISANCHOR         wxHTML_COND_ISANCHOR
-#define HTML_COND_ISIMAGEMAP       wxHTML_COND_ISIMAGEMAP
-#define HTML_COND_USER             wxHTML_COND_USER
-
-#endif
-
-
-
-#endif
-#endif

include/wx/html/htmlfilt.h

@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmlfilt.h
-// Purpose:     filters
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMLFILT_H_
-#define _WX_HTMLFILT_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "htmlfilt.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/filesys.h"
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlFilter
-//                  This class is input filter. It can "translate" files
-//                  in non-HTML format to HTML format
-//                  interface to access certain
-//                  kinds of files (HTPP, FTP, local, tar.gz etc..)
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlFilter : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxHtmlFilter)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlFilter() : wxObject() {}
-    virtual ~wxHtmlFilter() {}
-
-    // returns TRUE if this filter is able to open&read given file
-    virtual bool CanRead(const wxFSFile& file) const = 0;
-
-    // Reads given file and returns HTML document.
-    // Returns empty string if opening failed
-    virtual wxString ReadFile(const wxFSFile& file) const = 0;
-};
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlFilterPlainText
-//                  This filter is used as default filter if no other can
-//                  be used (= uknown type of file). It is used by
-//                  wxHtmlWindow itself.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlFilterPlainText : public wxHtmlFilter
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlFilterPlainText)
-
-public:
-    virtual bool CanRead(const wxFSFile& file) const;
-    virtual wxString ReadFile(const wxFSFile& file) const;
-};
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlFilterHTML
-//          filter for text/html
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class wxHtmlFilterHTML : public wxHtmlFilter
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlFilterHTML)
-
-    public:
-        virtual bool CanRead(const wxFSFile& file) const;
-        virtual wxString ReadFile(const wxFSFile& file) const;
-};
-
-
-
-#endif // wxUSE_HTML
-
-#endif // _WX_HTMLFILT_H_
-

include/wx/html/htmlpars.h

@@ -1,278 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmlpars.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlParser class (generic parser)
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMLPARS_H_
-#define _WX_HTMLPARS_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "htmlpars.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/html/htmltag.h"
-#include "wx/filesys.h"
-#include "wx/hash.h"
-#include "wx/fontenc.h"
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxMBConv;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlParser;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlTagHandler;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlEntitiesParser;
-
-class wxHtmlTextPieces;
-class wxHtmlParserState;
-
-
-enum wxHtmlURLType
-{
-    wxHTML_URL_PAGE,
-    wxHTML_URL_IMAGE,
-    wxHTML_URL_OTHER
-};
-
-// This class handles generic parsing of HTML document : it scans
-// the document and divide it into blocks of tags (where one block
-// consists of starting and ending tag and of text between these
-// 2 tags.
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlParser : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxHtmlParser)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlParser();
-    virtual ~wxHtmlParser();
-
-    // Sets the class which will be used for opening files
-    void SetFS(wxFileSystem *fs) { m_FS = fs; }
-
-    wxFileSystem* GetFS() const { return m_FS; }
-
-    // Opens file if the parser is allowed to open given URL (may be forbidden
-    // for security reasons)    
-    virtual wxFSFile *OpenURL(wxHtmlURLType type, const wxString& url) const;
-
-    // You can simply call this method when you need parsed output.
-    // This method does these things:
-    // 1. call InitParser(source);
-    // 2. call DoParsing();
-    // 3. call GetProduct(); (it's return value is then returned)
-    // 4. call DoneParser();
-    wxObject* Parse(const wxString& source);
-
-    // Sets the source. This must be called before running Parse() method.
-    virtual void InitParser(const wxString& source);
-    // This must be called after Parse().
-    virtual void DoneParser();
-    
-    // May be called during parsing to immediately return from Parse().
-    virtual void StopParsing() { m_stopParsing = TRUE; }
-
-    // Parses the m_Source from begin_pos to end_pos-1.
-    // (in noparams version it parses whole m_Source)
-    void DoParsing(int begin_pos, int end_pos);
-    void DoParsing();
-
-    // Returns pointer to the tag at parser's current position
-    wxHtmlTag *GetCurrentTag() const { return m_CurTag; }
-
-    // Returns product of parsing
-    // Returned value is result of parsing of the part. The type of this result
-    // depends on internal representation in derived parser
-    // (see wxHtmlWinParser for details).
-    virtual wxObject* GetProduct() = 0;
-
-    // adds handler to the list & hash table of handlers.
-    virtual void AddTagHandler(wxHtmlTagHandler *handler);
-
-    // Forces the handler to handle additional tags (not returned by GetSupportedTags). 
-    // The handler should already be in use by this parser.
-    // Example: you want to parse following pseudo-html structure:
-    //   <myitems>
-    //     <it name="one" value="1">
-    //     <it name="two" value="2">
-    //   </myitems>
-    //   <it> This last it has different meaning, we don't want it to be parsed by myitems handler!
-    // handler can handle only 'myitems' (e.g. it's GetSupportedTags returns "MYITEMS")
-    // you can call PushTagHandler(handler, "IT") when you find <myitems>
-    // and call PopTagHandler() when you find </myitems>
-    void PushTagHandler(wxHtmlTagHandler *handler, wxString tags);
-
-    // Restores state before last call to PushTagHandler
-    void PopTagHandler();
-
-    wxString* GetSource() {return &m_Source;}
-    void SetSource(const wxString& src);
-    
-    // Sets HTML source and remebers current parser's state so that it can
-    // later be restored. This is useful for on-line modifications of 
-    // HTML source (for example, <pre> handler replaces spaces with &nbsp;
-    // and newlines with <br>)
-    virtual void SetSourceAndSaveState(const wxString& src);
-    // Restores parser's state from stack or returns FALSE if the stack is
-    // empty
-    virtual bool RestoreState();
-    
-    // Parses HTML string 'markup' and extracts charset info from <meta> tag
-    // if present. Returns empty string if the tag is missing.
-    // For wxHTML's internal use.
-    static wxString ExtractCharsetInformation(const wxString& markup);
-
-protected:
-    // DOM structure
-    void CreateDOMTree();
-    void DestroyDOMTree();
-    void CreateDOMSubTree(wxHtmlTag *cur,
-                          int begin_pos, int end_pos, 
-                          wxHtmlTagsCache *cache);
-
-    // Adds text to the output.
-    // This is called from Parse() and must be overriden in derived classes.
-    // txt is not guaranteed to be only one word. It is largest continuous part of text
-    // (= not broken by tags)
-    // NOTE : using char* because of speed improvements
-    virtual void AddText(const wxChar* txt) = 0;
-
-    // Adds tag and proceeds it. Parse() may (and usually is) called from this method.
-    // This is called from Parse() and may be overriden.
-    // Default behavior is that it looks for proper handler in m_Handlers. The tag is
-    // ignored if no hander is found.
-    // Derived class is *responsible* for filling in m_Handlers table.
-    virtual void AddTag(const wxHtmlTag& tag);
-    
-    // Returns entity parser object, used to substitute HTML &entities;
-    wxHtmlEntitiesParser *GetEntitiesParser() const { return m_entitiesParser; }
-
-protected:
-    // DOM tree:
-    wxHtmlTag *m_CurTag;
-    wxHtmlTag *m_Tags;
-    wxHtmlTextPieces *m_TextPieces;
-    size_t m_CurTextPiece;
-
-    wxString m_Source;
-    
-    wxHtmlParserState *m_SavedStates;
-    
-    // handlers that handle particular tags. The table is accessed by
-    // key = tag's name.
-    // This attribute MUST be filled by derived class otherwise it would
-    // be empty and no tags would be recognized
-    // (see wxHtmlWinParser for details about filling it)
-    // m_HandlersHash is for random access based on knowledge of tag name (BR, P, etc.)
-    //      it may (and often does) contain more references to one object
-    // m_HandlersList is list of all handlers and it is guaranteed to contain
-    //      only one reference to each handler instance.
-    wxList m_HandlersList;
-    wxHashTable m_HandlersHash;
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlParser)
-
-    // class for opening files (file system)
-    wxFileSystem *m_FS;
-    // handlers stack used by PushTagHandler and PopTagHandler
-    wxList *m_HandlersStack;
-    
-    // entity parse
-    wxHtmlEntitiesParser *m_entitiesParser;
-    
-    // flag indicating that the parser should stop
-    bool m_stopParsing;
-};
-
-
-
-// This class (and derived classes) cooperates with wxHtmlParser.
-// Each recognized tag is passed to handler which is capable
-// of handling it. Each tag is handled in 3 steps:
-// 1. Handler will modifies state of parser
-//    (using it's public methods)
-// 2. Parser parses source between starting and ending tag
-// 3. Handler restores original state of the parser
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlTagHandler : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxHtmlTagHandler)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlTagHandler() : wxObject () { m_Parser = NULL; }
-
-    // Sets the parser.
-    // NOTE : each _instance_ of handler is guaranteed to be called
-    // only by one parser. This means you don't have to care about
-    // reentrancy.
-    virtual void SetParser(wxHtmlParser *parser) 
-        { m_Parser = parser; }
-
-    // Returns list of supported tags. The list is in uppercase and
-    // tags are delimited by ','.
-    // Example : "I,B,FONT,P"
-    //   is capable of handling italic, bold, font and paragraph tags
-    virtual wxString GetSupportedTags() = 0;
-
-    // This is hadling core method. It does all the Steps 1-3.
-    // To process step 2, you can call ParseInner()
-    // returned value : TRUE if it called ParseInner(),
-    //                  FALSE etherwise
-    virtual bool HandleTag(const wxHtmlTag& tag) = 0;
-
-protected:
-    // parses input between beginning and ending tag.
-    // m_Parser must be set.
-    void ParseInner(const wxHtmlTag& tag) 
-        { m_Parser->DoParsing(tag.GetBeginPos(), tag.GetEndPos1()); }
-
-    wxHtmlParser *m_Parser;
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlTagHandler)
-};
-
-
-// This class is used to parse HTML entities in strings. It can handle
-// both named entities and &#xxxx entries where xxxx is Unicode code.
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlEntitiesParser : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlEntitiesParser)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlEntitiesParser();
-    virtual ~wxHtmlEntitiesParser();
-    
-    // Sets encoding of output string.
-    // Has no effect if wxUSE_WCHAR_T==0 or wxUSE_UNICODE==1
-    void SetEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding);
-    
-    // Parses entities in input and replaces them with respective characters
-    // (with respect to output encoding)
-    wxString Parse(const wxString& input);
-
-    // Returns character for given entity or 0 if the enity is unknown
-    wxChar GetEntityChar(const wxString& entity);
-
-    // Returns character that represents given Unicode code
-#if wxUSE_UNICODE
-    wxChar GetCharForCode(unsigned code) { return (wxChar)code; }
-#else
-    wxChar GetCharForCode(unsigned code);
-#endif
-
-protected:
-#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T && !wxUSE_UNICODE
-    wxMBConv *m_conv;
-    wxFontEncoding m_encoding;
-#endif
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlEntitiesParser)
-};
-
-
-#endif
-
-#endif // _WX_HTMLPARS_H_

include/wx/html/htmlproc.h

@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmlprep.h
-// Purpose:     HTML processor
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 2001 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMLPREP_H_
-#define _WX_HTMLPREP_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "htmlproc.h"
-// (implementation is in htmlwin.cpp, there's no htmlprep.cpp!)
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/string.h"
-
-// Priority of preprocessor in the chain. The higher, the earlier it is used
-enum
-{
-    wxHTML_PRIORITY_DONTCARE = 128, // if the order doesn't matter, use this
-                                    // priority
-    wxHTML_PRIORITY_SYSTEM   = 256  // >=256 is only for wxHTML's internals
-};
-
-// Classes derived from this class serve as simple text processors for 
-// wxHtmlWindow. wxHtmlWindow runs HTML markup through all registered
-// processors before displaying it, thus allowing for on-the-fly
-// modifications of the markup.
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlProcessor : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxHtmlProcessor)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlProcessor() : wxObject(), m_enabled(TRUE) {}
-    virtual ~wxHtmlProcessor() {}
-
-    // Process input text and return processed result
-    virtual wxString Process(const wxString& text) const = 0;
-
-    // Return priority value of this processor. The higher, the sooner
-    // is the processor applied to the text.
-    virtual int GetPriority() const { return wxHTML_PRIORITY_DONTCARE; }
-    
-    // Enable/disable the processor. wxHtmlWindow won't use a disabled 
-    // processor even if it is in its processors queue.
-    virtual void Enable(bool enable = TRUE) { m_enabled = enable; }
-    bool IsEnabled() const { return m_enabled; }
-    
-protected:
-    bool m_enabled;
-};
-
-#endif // wxUSE_HTML
-
-#endif // _WX_HTMLPROC_H_

include/wx/html/htmltag.h

@@ -1,158 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmltag.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlTag class (represents single tag)
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMLTAG_H_
-#define _WX_HTMLTAG_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "htmltag.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/object.h"
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxColour;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlEntitiesParser;
-
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlTagsCache
-//          - internal wxHTML class, do not use!
-//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-struct wxHtmlCacheItem;
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlTagsCache : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlTagsCache)
-
-private:
-    wxHtmlCacheItem *m_Cache;
-    int m_CacheSize;
-    int m_CachePos;
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlTagsCache() : wxObject() {m_CacheSize = 0; m_Cache = NULL;}
-    wxHtmlTagsCache(const wxString& source);
-    ~wxHtmlTagsCache() {free(m_Cache);}
-
-    // Finds parameters for tag starting at at and fills the variables
-    void QueryTag(int at, int* end1, int* end2);
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlTagsCache)
-};
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlTag
-//                  This represents single tag. It is used as internal structure
-//                  by wxHtmlParser.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlTag : public wxObject
-{
-    DECLARE_CLASS(wxHtmlTag)
-
-protected:
-    // constructs wxHtmlTag object based on HTML tag.
-    // The tag begins (with '<' character) at position pos in source
-    // end_pos is position where parsing ends (usually end of document)
-    wxHtmlTag(wxHtmlTag *parent,
-              const wxString& source, int pos, int end_pos,
-              wxHtmlTagsCache *cache,
-              wxHtmlEntitiesParser *entParser);
-    friend class wxHtmlParser;
-public:
-    ~wxHtmlTag();
-
-    wxHtmlTag *GetParent() const {return m_Parent;}
-    wxHtmlTag *GetFirstSibling() const;
-    wxHtmlTag *GetLastSibling() const;
-    wxHtmlTag *GetChildren() const { return m_FirstChild; }
-    wxHtmlTag *GetPreviousSibling() const { return m_Prev; }
-    wxHtmlTag *GetNextSibling() const {return m_Next; }
-    // Return next tag, as if tree had been flattened
-    wxHtmlTag *GetNextTag() const;
-
-    // Returns tag's name in uppercase.
-    inline wxString GetName() const {return m_Name;}
-
-    // Returns TRUE if the tag has given parameter. Parameter
-    // should always be in uppercase.
-    // Example : <IMG SRC="test.jpg"> HasParam("SRC") returns TRUE
-    bool HasParam(const wxString& par) const;
-
-    // Returns value of the param. Value is in uppercase unless it is
-    // enclosed with "
-    // Example : <P align=right> GetParam("ALIGN") returns (RIGHT)
-    //           <P IMG SRC="WhaT.jpg"> GetParam("SRC") returns (WhaT.jpg)
-    //                           (or ("WhaT.jpg") if with_commas == TRUE)
-    wxString GetParam(const wxString& par, bool with_commas = FALSE) const;
-
-    // Convenience functions:
-    bool GetParamAsColour(const wxString& par, wxColour *clr) const;
-    bool GetParamAsInt(const wxString& par, int *clr) const;
-
-    // Scans param like scanf() functions family does.
-    // Example : ScanParam("COLOR", "\"#%X\"", &clr);
-    // This is always with with_commas=FALSE
-    // Returns number of scanned values
-    // (like sscanf() does)
-    // NOTE: unlike scanf family, this function only accepts
-    //       *one* parameter !
-    int ScanParam(const wxString& par, const wxChar *format, void *param) const;
-
-    // Returns string containing all params.
-    wxString GetAllParams() const;
-
-#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
-    // return TRUE if this is ending tag (</something>) or FALSE
-    // if it isn't (<something>)
-    inline bool IsEnding() const {return FALSE;}
-#endif
-
-    // return TRUE if this there is matching ending tag
-    inline bool HasEnding() const {return m_End1 >= 0;}
-
-    // returns beginning position of _internal_ block of text
-    // See explanation (returned value is marked with *):
-    // bla bla bla <MYTAG>* bla bla intenal text</MYTAG> bla bla
-    inline int GetBeginPos() const {return m_Begin;}
-    // returns ending position of _internal_ block of text.
-    // bla bla bla <MYTAG> bla bla intenal text*</MYTAG> bla bla
-    inline int GetEndPos1() const {return m_End1;}
-    // returns end position 2 :
-    // bla bla bla <MYTAG> bla bla internal text</MYTAG>* bla bla
-    inline int GetEndPos2() const {return m_End2;}
-
-private:
-    wxString m_Name;
-    int m_Begin, m_End1, m_End2;
-    wxArrayString m_ParamNames, m_ParamValues;
-
-    // DOM tree relations:
-    wxHtmlTag *m_Next;
-    wxHtmlTag *m_Prev;
-    wxHtmlTag *m_FirstChild, *m_LastChild;
-    wxHtmlTag *m_Parent;
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlTag)
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-#endif
-
-#endif // _WX_HTMLTAG_H_
-

include/wx/html/htmlwin.h

@@ -1,284 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmlwin.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlWindow class for parsing & displaying HTML
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMLWIN_H_
-#define _WX_HTMLWIN_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "htmlwin.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/window.h"
-#include "wx/scrolwin.h"
-#include "wx/config.h"
-#include "wx/treectrl.h"
-#include "wx/html/winpars.h"
-#include "wx/html/htmlcell.h"
-#include "wx/filesys.h"
-#include "wx/html/htmlfilt.h"
-#include "wx/filename.h"
-
-class wxHtmlProcessor;
-class wxHtmlWinModule;
-class wxHtmlHistoryArray;
-class wxHtmlProcessorList;
-
-
-// wxHtmlWindow flags:
-#define wxHW_SCROLLBAR_NEVER    0x0002
-#define wxHW_SCROLLBAR_AUTO     0x0004
-
-// enums for wxHtmlWindow::OnOpeningURL
-enum wxHtmlOpeningStatus
-{
-    wxHTML_OPEN,
-    wxHTML_BLOCK,
-    wxHTML_REDIRECT
-};
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlWindow
-//                  (This is probably the only class you will directly use.)
-//                  Purpose of this class is to display HTML page (either local
-//                  file or downloaded via HTTP protocol) in a window. Width
-//                  of window is constant - given in constructor - virtual height
-//                  is changed dynamicly depending on page size.
-//                  Once the window is created you can set it's content by calling
-//                  SetPage(text) or LoadPage(filename).
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWindow : public wxScrolledWindow
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlWindow)
-    friend class wxHtmlWinModule;
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlWindow() { Init(); }
-    wxHtmlWindow(wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id = -1,
-                 const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
-                 const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
-                 long style = wxHW_SCROLLBAR_AUTO,
-                 const wxString& name = wxT("htmlWindow"))
-    {
-        Init();
-        Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, name);
-    }
-    ~wxHtmlWindow();
-
-    bool Create(wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id = -1,
-                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
-                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
-                long style = wxHW_SCROLLBAR_AUTO,
-                const wxString& name = wxT("htmlWindow"));
-
-    // Set HTML page and display it. !! source is HTML document itself,
-    // it is NOT address/filename of HTML document. If you want to
-    // specify document location, use LoadPage() istead
-    // Return value : FALSE if an error occured, TRUE otherwise
-    bool SetPage(const wxString& source);
-
-    // Append to current page
-    bool AppendToPage(const wxString& source);
-
-    // Load HTML page from given location. Location can be either
-    // a) /usr/wxGTK2/docs/html/wx.htm
-    // b) http://www.somewhere.uk/document.htm
-    // c) ftp://ftp.somesite.cz/pub/something.htm
-    // In case there is no prefix (http:,ftp:), the method
-    // will try to find it itself (1. local file, then http or ftp)
-    // After the page is loaded, the method calls SetPage() to display it.
-    // Note : you can also use path relative to previously loaded page
-    // Return value : same as SetPage
-    virtual bool LoadPage(const wxString& location);
-
-    // Loads HTML page from file
-    bool LoadFile(const wxFileName& filename);
-
-    // Returns full location of opened page
-    wxString GetOpenedPage() const {return m_OpenedPage;}
-    // Returns anchor within opened page
-    wxString GetOpenedAnchor() const {return m_OpenedAnchor;}
-    // Returns <TITLE> of opened page or empty string otherwise
-    wxString GetOpenedPageTitle() const {return m_OpenedPageTitle;}
-
-    // Sets frame in which page title will  be displayed. Format is format of
-    // frame title, e.g. "HtmlHelp : %s". It must contain exactly one %s
-    void SetRelatedFrame(wxFrame* frame, const wxString& format);
-    wxFrame* GetRelatedFrame() const {return m_RelatedFrame;}
-
-    // After(!) calling SetRelatedFrame, this sets statusbar slot where messages
-    // will be displayed. Default is -1 = no messages.
-    void SetRelatedStatusBar(int bar);
-
-    // Sets fonts to be used when displaying HTML page.
-    void SetFonts(wxString normal_face, wxString fixed_face,
-                  const int *sizes = NULL);
-
-    // Sets space between text and window borders.
-    void SetBorders(int b) {m_Borders = b;}
-
-    // Saves custom settings into cfg config. it will use the path 'path'
-    // if given, otherwise it will save info into currently selected path.
-    // saved values : things set by SetFonts, SetBorders.
-    virtual void ReadCustomization(wxConfigBase *cfg, wxString path = wxEmptyString);
-    // ...
-    virtual void WriteCustomization(wxConfigBase *cfg, wxString path = wxEmptyString);
-
-    // Goes to previous/next page (in browsing history)
-    // Returns TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise
-    bool HistoryBack();
-    bool HistoryForward();
-    bool HistoryCanBack();
-    bool HistoryCanForward();
-    // Resets history
-    void HistoryClear();
-
-    // Returns pointer to conteiners/cells structure.
-    // It should be used ONLY when printing
-    wxHtmlContainerCell* GetInternalRepresentation() const {return m_Cell;}
-
-    // Adds input filter
-    static void AddFilter(wxHtmlFilter *filter);
-
-    // Returns a pointer to the parser.
-    wxHtmlWinParser *GetParser() const { return m_Parser; }
-
-    // Adds HTML processor to this instance of wxHtmlWindow:
-    void AddProcessor(wxHtmlProcessor *processor);
-    // Adds HTML processor to wxHtmlWindow class as whole:
-    static void AddGlobalProcessor(wxHtmlProcessor *processor);
-
-    // what would we do with it?
-    virtual bool AcceptsFocusFromKeyboard() const { return FALSE; }
-
-    // -- Callbacks --
-
-    // Sets the title of the window
-    // (depending on the information passed to SetRelatedFrame() method)
-    virtual void OnSetTitle(const wxString& title);
-
-    // Called when the mouse hovers over a cell: (x, y) are logical coords
-    // Default behaviour is to do nothing at all
-    virtual void OnCellMouseHover(wxHtmlCell *cell, wxCoord x, wxCoord y);
-
-    // Called when user clicks on a cell. Default behavior is to call
-    // OnLinkClicked() if this cell corresponds to a hypertext link
-    virtual void OnCellClicked(wxHtmlCell *cell,
-                               wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
-                               const wxMouseEvent& event);
-
-    // Called when user clicked on hypertext link. Default behavior is to
-    // call LoadPage(loc)
-    virtual void OnLinkClicked(const wxHtmlLinkInfo& link);
-
-    // Called when wxHtmlWindow wants to fetch data from an URL (e.g. when
-    // loading a page or loading an image). The data are downloaded if and only if
-    // OnOpeningURL returns TRUE. If OnOpeningURL returns wxHTML_REDIRECT,
-    // it must set *redirect to the new URL
-    virtual wxHtmlOpeningStatus OnOpeningURL(wxHtmlURLType WXUNUSED(type),
-                                             const wxString& WXUNUSED(url),
-                                             wxString *WXUNUSED(redirect)) const
-        { return wxHTML_OPEN; }
-
-protected:
-    void Init();
-
-    // Scrolls to anchor of this name. (Anchor is #news
-    // or #features etc. it is part of address sometimes:
-    // http://www.ms.mff.cuni.cz/~vsla8348/wxhtml/index.html#news)
-    // Return value : TRUE if anchor exists, FALSE otherwise
-    bool ScrollToAnchor(const wxString& anchor);
-
-    // Prepares layout (= fill m_PosX, m_PosY for fragments) based on
-    // actual size of window. This method also setup scrollbars
-    void CreateLayout();
-
-    void OnDraw(wxDC& dc);
-    void OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event);
-    void OnMouseEvent(wxMouseEvent& event);
-    void OnIdle(wxIdleEvent& event);
-
-    // Returns new filter (will be stored into m_DefaultFilter variable)
-    virtual wxHtmlFilter *GetDefaultFilter() {return new wxHtmlFilterPlainText;}
-
-    // cleans static variables
-    static void CleanUpStatics();
-
-protected:
-    // This is pointer to the first cell in parsed data.
-    // (Note: the first cell is usually top one = all other cells are sub-cells of this one)
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *m_Cell;
-    // parser which is used to parse HTML input.
-    // Each wxHtmlWindow has it's own parser because sharing one global
-    // parser would be problematic (because of reentrancy)
-    wxHtmlWinParser *m_Parser;
-    // contains name of actualy opened page or empty string if no page opened
-    wxString m_OpenedPage;
-    // contains name of current anchor within m_OpenedPage
-    wxString m_OpenedAnchor;
-    // contains title of actualy opened page or empty string if no <TITLE> tag
-    wxString m_OpenedPageTitle;
-    // class for opening files (file system)
-    wxFileSystem* m_FS;
-
-    wxFrame *m_RelatedFrame;
-    wxString m_TitleFormat;
-    // frame in which page title should be displayed & number of it's statusbar
-    // reserved for usage with this html window
-    int m_RelatedStatusBar;
-
-    // borders (free space between text and window borders)
-    // defaults to 10 pixels.
-    int m_Borders;
-
-    int m_Style;
-
-private:
-    // a flag indicated if mouse moved
-    // (if TRUE we will try to change cursor in last call to OnIdle)
-    bool m_tmpMouseMoved;
-    // contains last link name
-    wxHtmlLinkInfo *m_tmpLastLink;
-    // contains the last (terminal) cell which contained the mouse
-    wxHtmlCell *m_tmpLastCell;
-    // if >0 contents of the window is not redrawn
-    // (in order to avoid ugly blinking)
-    int m_tmpCanDrawLocks;
-
-    // list of HTML filters
-    static wxList m_Filters;
-    // this filter is used when no filter is able to read some file
-    static wxHtmlFilter *m_DefaultFilter;
-
-    static wxCursor *s_cur_hand;
-    static wxCursor *s_cur_arrow;
-
-    wxHtmlHistoryArray *m_History;
-    // browser history
-    int m_HistoryPos;
-    // if this FLAG is false, items are not added to history
-    bool m_HistoryOn;
-
-    // html processors array:
-    wxHtmlProcessorList *m_Processors;
-    static wxHtmlProcessorList *m_GlobalProcessors;
-
-    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlWindow)
-};
-
-
-#endif
-
-#endif // _WX_HTMLWIN_H_
-

include/wx/html/htmprint.h

@@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        htmprint.h
-// Purpose:     html printing classes
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// Created:     25/09/99
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c)
-// Licence:     wxWindows licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-#ifndef _WX_HTMPRINT_H_
-#define _WX_HTMPRINT_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "htmprint.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML & wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
-
-#include "wx/html/htmlcell.h"
-#include "wx/html/winpars.h"
-
-#include "wx/print.h"
-#include "wx/printdlg.h"
-
-#include <limits.h> // INT_MAX
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlDCRenderer
-//                  This class is capable of rendering HTML into specified 
-//                  portion of DC
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlDCRenderer : public wxObject
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlDCRenderer();
-    ~wxHtmlDCRenderer();
-
-    // Following 3 methods *must* be called before any call to Render:
-
-    // Assign DC to this render
-    void SetDC(wxDC *dc, double pixel_scale = 1.0);
-
-    // Sets size of output rectangle, in pixels. Note that you *can't* change
-    // width of the rectangle between calls to Render! (You can freely change height.)
-    void SetSize(int width, int height);
-
-    // Sets the text to be displayed.
-    // Basepath is base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
-    // file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.
-    // isdir is FALSE if basepath is filename, TRUE if it is directory name
-    // (see wxFileSystem for detailed explanation)
-    void SetHtmlText(const wxString& html, const wxString& basepath = wxEmptyString, bool isdir = TRUE);
-
-    // Sets fonts to be used when displaying HTML page. (if size null then default sizes used).
-    void SetFonts(wxString normal_face, wxString fixed_face, const int *sizes = NULL);
-
-    // [x,y] is position of upper-left corner of printing rectangle (see SetSize)
-    // from is y-coordinate of the very first visible cell
-    // to is y-coordinate of the next following page break, if any
-    // Returned value is y coordinate of first cell than didn't fit onto page.
-    // Use this value as 'from' in next call to Render in order to print multiple pages
-    // document
-    // If dont_render is TRUE then nothing is rendered into DC and it only counts
-    // pixels and return y coord of the next page
-    //
-    // known_pagebreaks and number_of_pages are used only when counting pages;
-    // otherwise, their default values should be used. Their purpose is to
-    // support pagebreaks using a subset of CSS2's <DIV>. The <DIV> handler
-    // needs to know what pagebreaks have already been set so that it doesn't
-    // set the same pagebreak twice.
-    //
-    // CAUTION! Render() changes DC's user scale and does NOT restore it!
-    int Render(int x, int y, int from = 0, int dont_render = FALSE, int to = INT_MAX,
-               int *known_pagebreaks = NULL, int number_of_pages = 0);
-
-    // returns total height of the html document
-    // (compare Render's return value with this)
-    int GetTotalHeight();
-
-private:
-    wxDC *m_DC;
-    wxHtmlWinParser *m_Parser;
-    wxFileSystem *m_FS;
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *m_Cells;
-    int m_MaxWidth, m_Width, m_Height;
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlDCRenderer)
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-enum {
-    wxPAGE_ODD,
-    wxPAGE_EVEN,
-    wxPAGE_ALL
-};
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlPrintout
-//                  This class is derived from standard wxWindows printout class
-//                  and is used to print HTML documents.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlPrintout : public wxPrintout
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlPrintout(const wxString& title = wxT("Printout"));
-    ~wxHtmlPrintout();
-
-    void SetHtmlText(const wxString& html, const wxString &basepath = wxEmptyString, bool isdir = TRUE); 
-            // prepares the class for printing this html document.
-            // Must be called before using the class, in fact just after constructor
-            //
-            // basepath is base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
-            // file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.
-            // isdir is FALSE if basepath is filename, TRUE if it is directory name
-            // (see wxFileSystem for detailed explanation)
-
-    void SetHtmlFile(const wxString &htmlfile);
-            // same as SetHtmlText except that it takes regular file as the parameter
-
-    void SetHeader(const wxString& header, int pg = wxPAGE_ALL);
-    void SetFooter(const wxString& footer, int pg = wxPAGE_ALL);
-            // sets header/footer for the document. The argument is interpreted as HTML document.
-            // You can use macros in it:
-            //   @PAGENUM@ is replaced by page number
-            //   @PAGESCNT@ is replaced by total number of pages
-            //
-            // pg is one of wxPAGE_ODD, wxPAGE_EVEN and wx_PAGE_ALL constants.
-            // You can set different header/footer for odd and even pages
-
-    // Sets fonts to be used when displaying HTML page. (if size null then default sizes used).
-    void SetFonts(wxString normal_face, wxString fixed_face, const int *sizes = NULL);
-
-    void SetMargins(float top = 25.2, float bottom = 25.2, float left = 25.2, float right = 25.2, 
-                    float spaces = 5);
-            // sets margins in milimeters. Defaults to 1 inch for margins and 0.5cm for space
-            // between text and header and/or footer
-
-    // wxPrintout stuff:        
-    bool OnPrintPage(int page);
-    bool HasPage(int page);
-    void GetPageInfo(int *minPage, int *maxPage, int *selPageFrom, int *selPageTo);
-    bool OnBeginDocument(int startPage, int endPage);
-
-private:
-
-    void RenderPage(wxDC *dc, int page);
-            // renders one page into dc
-    wxString TranslateHeader(const wxString& instr, int page);
-            // substitute @PAGENUM@ and @PAGESCNT@ by real values
-    void CountPages();
-            // counts pages and fills m_NumPages and m_PageBreaks
-
-
-private:
-    int m_NumPages;
-    int m_PageBreaks[wxHTML_PRINT_MAX_PAGES];
-
-    wxString m_Document, m_BasePath;
-    bool m_BasePathIsDir;
-    wxString m_Headers[2], m_Footers[2];
-
-    int m_HeaderHeight, m_FooterHeight;
-    wxHtmlDCRenderer *m_Renderer, *m_RendererHdr;
-    float m_MarginTop, m_MarginBottom, m_MarginLeft, m_MarginRight, m_MarginSpace;
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlPrintout)
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlEasyPrinting
-//                  This class provides very simple interface to printing 
-//                  architecture. It allows you to print HTML documents only
-//                  with very few commands. 
-//
-//                  Note : do not create this class on stack only.
-//                         You should create an instance on app startup and 
-//                         use this instance for all printing. Why? The class
-//                         stores page&printer settings in it.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlEasyPrinting : public wxObject
-{
-public:
-    wxHtmlEasyPrinting(const wxString& name = wxT("Printing"), wxFrame *parent_frame = NULL);
-    ~wxHtmlEasyPrinting();
-
-    bool PreviewFile(const wxString &htmlfile);
-    bool PreviewText(const wxString &htmltext, const wxString& basepath = wxEmptyString);
-            // Preview file / html-text for printing
-            // (and offers printing)
-            // basepath is base directory for opening subsequent files (e.g. from <img> tag)
-
-    bool PrintFile(const wxString &htmlfile);
-    bool PrintText(const wxString &htmltext, const wxString& basepath = wxEmptyString);
-            // Print file / html-text w/o preview
-
-    void PrinterSetup();
-    void PageSetup();
-            // pop up printer or page setup dialog
-
-    void SetHeader(const wxString& header, int pg = wxPAGE_ALL);
-    void SetFooter(const wxString& footer, int pg = wxPAGE_ALL);
-            // sets header/footer for the document. The argument is interpreted as HTML document.
-            // You can use macros in it:
-            //   @PAGENUM@ is replaced by page number
-            //   @PAGESCNT@ is replaced by total number of pages
-            //
-            // pg is one of wxPAGE_ODD, wxPAGE_EVEN and wx_PAGE_ALL constants.
-            // You can set different header/footer for odd and even pages
-
-    void SetFonts(wxString normal_face, wxString fixed_face, const int *sizes = 0);
-    // Sets fonts to be used when displaying HTML page. (if size null then default sizes used)
-
-    wxPrintData *GetPrintData() {return m_PrintData;}
-    wxPageSetupDialogData *GetPageSetupData() {return m_PageSetupData;}
-            // return page setting data objects. 
-            // (You can set their parameters.)
-
-protected:
-    virtual wxHtmlPrintout *CreatePrintout();
-    virtual bool DoPreview(wxHtmlPrintout *printout1, wxHtmlPrintout *printout2);
-    virtual bool DoPrint(wxHtmlPrintout *printout);
-
-private:
-    wxPrintData *m_PrintData;
-    wxPageSetupDialogData *m_PageSetupData;
-    wxString m_Name;
-    int m_FontsSizesArr[7];
-    int *m_FontsSizes;
-    wxString m_FontFaceFixed, m_FontFaceNormal;
-    wxString m_Headers[2], m_Footers[2];
-    wxFrame *m_Frame;
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlEasyPrinting)
-};
-
-
-
-
-#endif  // wxUSE_HTML & wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
-
-#endif // _WX_HTMPRINT_H_
-

include/wx/html/m_templ.h

@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        m_templ.h
-// Purpose:     Modules template file
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-/*
-
-DESCRIPTION:
-This is set of macros for easier writing of tag handlers. How to use it?
-See mod_fonts.cpp for example...
-
-Attention! This is quite strange C++ bastard. Before using it,
-I STRONGLY recommend reading and understanding these macros!!
-
-*/
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_M_TEMPL_H_
-#define _WX_M_TEMPL_H_
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/html/winpars.h"
-
-#define TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(name,tags)                                      \
-    class HTML_Handler_##name : public wxHtmlWinTagHandler                \
-    {                                                                     \
-        public:                                                           \
-            wxString GetSupportedTags() {return wxT(tags);}
-
-
-
-#define TAG_HANDLER_VARS                                                  \
-        private:
-
-#define TAG_HANDLER_CONSTR(name)                                                \
-        public:                                                           \
-        HTML_Handler_##name () : wxHtmlWinTagHandler()
-
-
-#define TAG_HANDLER_PROC(varib)                                           \
-        public:                                                           \
-            bool HandleTag(const wxHtmlTag& varib)
-
-
-
-#define TAG_HANDLER_END(name)                                             \
-    };
-
-
-
-
-#define TAGS_MODULE_BEGIN(name)                                           \
-    class HTML_Module##name : public wxHtmlTagsModule                     \
-    {                                                                     \
-        DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(HTML_Module##name )                         \
-        public:                                                           \
-            void FillHandlersTable(wxHtmlWinParser *parser)               \
-                {
-
-
-
-
-#define TAGS_MODULE_ADD(handler)                                          \
-                    parser->AddTagHandler(new HTML_Handler_##handler);
-
-
-
-
-#define TAGS_MODULE_END(name)                                             \
-                }                                                         \
-    };                                                                    \
-    IMPLEMENT_DYNAMIC_CLASS(HTML_Module##name , wxHtmlTagsModule)
-
-
-
-#endif
-#endif

include/wx/html/winpars.h

@@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-// Name:        winpars.h
-// Purpose:     wxHtmlWinParser class (parser to be used with wxHtmlWindow)
-// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
-// RCS-ID:      $Id$
-// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
-// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
-/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-
-
-#ifndef _WX_WINPARS_H_
-#define _WX_WINPARS_H_
-
-#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
-#pragma interface "winpars.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "wx/defs.h"
-#if wxUSE_HTML
-
-#include "wx/module.h"
-#include "wx/font.h"
-#include "wx/html/htmlpars.h"
-#include "wx/html/htmlcell.h"
-#include "wx/encconv.h"
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWindow;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWinParser;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWinTagHandler;
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlTagsModule;
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlWinParser
-//                  This class is derived from wxHtmlParser and its mail goal
-//                  is to parse HTML input so that it can be displayed in
-//                  wxHtmlWindow. It uses special wxHtmlWinTagHandler.
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWinParser : public wxHtmlParser
-{
-    friend class wxHtmlWindow;
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlWinParser(wxHtmlWindow *wnd = NULL);
-    ~wxHtmlWinParser();
-
-    virtual void InitParser(const wxString& source);
-    virtual void DoneParser();
-    virtual wxObject* GetProduct();
-
-    virtual wxFSFile *OpenURL(wxHtmlURLType type, const wxString& url) const;
-
-    // Set's the DC used for parsing. If SetDC() is not called,
-    // parsing won't proceed
-    virtual void SetDC(wxDC *dc, double pixel_scale = 1.0)
-        { m_DC = dc; m_PixelScale = pixel_scale; }
-
-    wxDC *GetDC() {return m_DC;}
-    double GetPixelScale() {return m_PixelScale;}
-    int GetCharHeight() const {return m_CharHeight;}
-    int GetCharWidth() const {return m_CharWidth;}
-
-    // NOTE : these functions do _not_ return _actual_
-    // height/width. They return h/w of default font
-    // for this DC. If you want actual values, call
-    // GetDC()->GetChar...()
-
-    // returns associated wxWindow
-    wxHtmlWindow *GetWindow() {return m_Window;}
-
-    // Sets fonts to be used when displaying HTML page. (if size null then default sizes used).
-    void SetFonts(wxString normal_face, wxString fixed_face, const int *sizes = NULL);
-
-    // Adds tags module. see wxHtmlTagsModule for details.
-    static void AddModule(wxHtmlTagsModule *module);
-
-    static void RemoveModule(wxHtmlTagsModule *module);
-
-    // parsing-related methods. These methods are called by tag handlers:
-
-    // Returns pointer to actual container. Common use in tag handler is :
-    // m_WParser->GetContainer()->InsertCell(new ...);
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *GetContainer() const {return m_Container;}
-
-    // opens new container. This container is sub-container of opened
-    // container. Sets GetContainer to newly created container
-    // and returns it.
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *OpenContainer();
-
-    // works like OpenContainer except that new container is not created
-    // but c is used. You can use this to directly set actual container
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *SetContainer(wxHtmlContainerCell *c);
-
-    // closes the container and sets actual Container to upper-level
-    // container
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *CloseContainer();
-
-    int GetFontSize() const {return m_FontSize;}
-    void SetFontSize(int s);
-    int GetFontBold() const {return m_FontBold;}
-    void SetFontBold(int x) {m_FontBold = x;}
-    int GetFontItalic() const {return m_FontItalic;}
-    void SetFontItalic(int x) {m_FontItalic = x;}
-    int GetFontUnderlined() const {return m_FontUnderlined;}
-    void SetFontUnderlined(int x) {m_FontUnderlined = x;}
-    int GetFontFixed() const {return m_FontFixed;}
-    void SetFontFixed(int x) {m_FontFixed = x;}
-    wxString GetFontFace() const {return GetFontFixed() ? m_FontFaceFixed : m_FontFaceNormal;}
-    void SetFontFace(const wxString& face);
-
-    int GetAlign() const {return m_Align;}
-    void SetAlign(int a) {m_Align = a;}
-    const wxColour& GetLinkColor() const { return m_LinkColor; }
-    void SetLinkColor(const wxColour& clr) { m_LinkColor = clr; }
-    const wxColour& GetActualColor() const { return m_ActualColor; }
-    void SetActualColor(const wxColour& clr) { m_ActualColor = clr ;}
-    const wxHtmlLinkInfo& GetLink() const { return m_Link; }
-    void SetLink(const wxHtmlLinkInfo& link);
-
-#if !wxUSE_UNICODE
-    void SetInputEncoding(wxFontEncoding enc);
-    wxFontEncoding GetInputEncoding() const { return m_InputEnc; }
-    wxFontEncoding GetOutputEncoding() const { return m_OutputEnc; }
-    wxEncodingConverter *GetEncodingConverter() const { return m_EncConv; }
-#endif
-
-    // creates font depending on m_Font* members.
-    virtual wxFont* CreateCurrentFont();
-
-protected:
-    virtual void AddText(const wxChar* txt);
-
-private:
-    bool m_tmpLastWasSpace;
-    wxChar *m_tmpStrBuf;
-    size_t  m_tmpStrBufSize;
-        // temporary variables used by AddText
-    wxHtmlWindow *m_Window;
-            // window we're parsing for
-    double m_PixelScale;
-    wxDC *m_DC;
-            // Device Context we're parsing for
-    static wxList m_Modules;
-            // list of tags modules (see wxHtmlTagsModule for details)
-            // This list is used to initialize m_Handlers member.
-
-    wxHtmlContainerCell *m_Container;
-            // actual container. See Open/CloseContainer for details.
-
-    int m_FontBold, m_FontItalic, m_FontUnderlined, m_FontFixed; // this is not TRUE,FALSE but 1,0, we need it for indexing
-    int m_FontSize; /* -2 to +4,  0 is default */
-    wxColour m_LinkColor;
-    wxColour m_ActualColor;
-            // basic font parameters.
-    wxHtmlLinkInfo m_Link;
-            // actual hypertext link or empty string
-    bool m_UseLink;
-            // TRUE if m_Link is not empty
-    long m_CharHeight, m_CharWidth;
-            // average height of normal-sized text
-    int m_Align;
-            // actual alignment
-
-    wxFont* m_FontsTable[2][2][2][2][7];
-    wxString m_FontsFacesTable[2][2][2][2][7];
-#if !wxUSE_UNICODE
-    wxFontEncoding m_FontsEncTable[2][2][2][2][7];
-#endif
-            // table of loaded fonts. 1st four indexes are 0 or 1, depending on on/off
-            // state of these flags (from left to right):
-            // [bold][italic][underlined][fixed_size]
-            // last index is font size : from 0 to 6 (remapped from html sizes 1 to 7)
-            // Note : this table covers all possible combinations of fonts, but not
-            // all of them are used, so many items in table are usually NULL.
-    int m_FontsSizes[7];
-    wxString m_FontFaceFixed, m_FontFaceNormal;
-            // html font sizes and faces of fixed and proportional fonts
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlWinParser)
-
-#if !wxUSE_UNICODE
-    wxFontEncoding m_InputEnc, m_OutputEnc;
-            // I/O font encodings
-    wxEncodingConverter *m_EncConv;
-#endif
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlWinTagHandler
-//                  This is basicly wxHtmlTagHandler except
-//                  it is extended with protected member m_Parser pointing to
-//                  the wxHtmlWinParser object
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlWinTagHandler : public wxHtmlTagHandler
-{
-    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxHtmlWinTagHandler)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlWinTagHandler() : wxHtmlTagHandler() {};
-
-    virtual void SetParser(wxHtmlParser *parser) {wxHtmlTagHandler::SetParser(parser); m_WParser = (wxHtmlWinParser*) parser;};
-
-protected:
-    wxHtmlWinParser *m_WParser; // same as m_Parser, but overcasted
-
-    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHtmlWinTagHandler)
-};
-
-
-
-
-
-
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-// wxHtmlTagsModule
-//                  This is basic of dynamic tag handlers binding.
-//                  The class provides methods for filling parser's handlers
-//                  hash table.
-//                  (See documentation for details)
-//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-class WXDLLEXPORT wxHtmlTagsModule : public wxModule
-{
-    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxHtmlTagsModule)
-
-public:
-    wxHtmlTagsModule() : wxModule() {};
-
-    virtual bool OnInit();
-    virtual void OnExit();
-
-    // This is called by wxHtmlWinParser.
-    // The method must simply call parser->AddTagHandler(new <handler_class_name>);
-    // for each handler
-    virtual void FillHandlersTable(wxHtmlWinParser * WXUNUSED(parser)) { }
-};
-
-
-#endif
-
-#endif // _WX_WINPARS_H_
-
-
-
-
-

include/wx/icon.h

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+#ifndef _WX_ICON_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_ICON_H_BASE_
+
+/* Commenting out since duplicated in gdicmn.h
+// this is for Unix (i.e. now for anything other than MSW)
+#undef  wxICON
+#define wxICON(icon_name)   wxIcon(icon_name##_xpm)
+*/
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+  #include "wx/msw/icon.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+  #include "wx/motif/icon.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+  #include "wx/gtk/icon.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+  #include "wx/mgl/icon.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+  #include "wx/qt/icon.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+  #include "wx/mac/icon.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+  #include "wx/os2/icon.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+  #include "wx/stubs/icon.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_ICON_H_BASE_

include/wx/listbox.h

@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/listbox.h
+// Purpose:     wxListBox class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     22.10.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_LISTBOX_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_LISTBOX_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "listboxbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_LISTBOX
+
+#include "wx/ctrlsub.h"         // base class
+
+// forward declarations are enough here
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxArrayInt;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxArrayString;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxListBoxNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxListBox interface is defined by the class wxListBoxBase
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxListBoxBase : public wxControlWithItems
+{
+public:
+    // all generic methods are in wxControlWithItems, except for the following
+    // ones which are not yet implemented by wxChoice/wxCombobox
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    virtual ~wxListBoxBase() { }
+#endif
+
+    void Insert(const wxString& item, int pos)
+        { DoInsert(item, pos); }
+    void Insert(const wxString& item, int pos, void *clientData)
+        { DoInsert(item, pos); SetClientData(pos, clientData); }
+    void Insert(const wxString& item, int pos, wxClientData *clientData)
+        { DoInsert(item, pos); SetClientObject(pos, clientData); }
+
+    void InsertItems(int nItems, const wxString *items, int pos);
+    void InsertItems(const wxArrayString& items, int pos)
+        { DoInsertItems(items, pos); }
+
+    void Set(int n, const wxString* items, void **clientData = NULL);
+    void Set(const wxArrayString& items, void **clientData = NULL)
+        { DoSetItems(items, clientData); }
+
+    // multiple selection logic
+    virtual bool IsSelected(int n) const = 0;
+    virtual void SetSelection(int n, bool select = TRUE) = 0;
+    virtual void Select(int n) { SetSelection(n, TRUE); }
+    void Deselect(int n) { SetSelection(n, FALSE); }
+    void DeselectAll(int itemToLeaveSelected = -1);
+
+    virtual bool SetStringSelection(const wxString& s, bool select = TRUE);
+
+    // works for single as well as multiple selection listboxes (unlike
+    // GetSelection which only works for listboxes with single selection)
+    virtual int GetSelections(wxArrayInt& aSelections) const = 0;
+
+    // set the specified item at the first visible item or scroll to max
+    // range.
+    void SetFirstItem(int n) { DoSetFirstItem(n); }
+    void SetFirstItem(const wxString& s);
+
+    // ensures that the given item is visible scrolling the listbox if
+    // necessary
+    virtual void EnsureVisible(int n);
+
+    // a combination of Append() and EnsureVisible(): appends the item to the
+    // listbox and ensures that it is visible i.e. not scrolled out of view
+    void AppendAndEnsureVisible(const wxString& s);
+
+    // return TRUE if the listbox allows multiple selection
+    bool HasMultipleSelection() const
+    {
+        return (m_windowStyle & wxLB_MULTIPLE) ||
+               (m_windowStyle & wxLB_EXTENDED);
+    }
+
+    // return TRUE if this listbox is sorted
+    bool IsSorted() const { return (m_windowStyle & wxLB_SORT) != 0; }
+
+    // emulate selecting or deselecting the item event.GetInt() (depending on
+    // event.GetExtraLong())
+    void Command(wxCommandEvent& event);
+
+    // compatibility - these functions are deprecated, use the new ones
+    // instead
+    bool Selected(int n) const { return IsSelected(n); }
+
+protected:
+    // NB: due to wxGTK implementation details, DoInsert() is implemented
+    //     using DoInsertItems() and not the other way round
+    void DoInsert(const wxString& item, int pos)
+        { InsertItems(1, &item, pos); }
+
+    // to be implemented in derived classes
+    virtual void DoInsertItems(const wxArrayString& items, int pos) = 0;
+    virtual void DoSetItems(const wxArrayString& items, void **clientData) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoSetFirstItem(int n) = 0;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-specific class declaration
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/listbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/listbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/listbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/listbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/listbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/listbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/listbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/listbox.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_LISTBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_LISTBOX_H_BASE_

include/wx/mdi.h

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#ifndef _WX_MDI_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_MDI_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/mdi.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/mdi.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/mdi.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/mdi.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/mdi.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/mdi.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/mdi.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_MDI_H_BASE_

include/wx/menu.h

@@ -0,0 +1,468 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/menu.h
+// Purpose:     wxMenu and wxMenuBar classes
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.10.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_MENU_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_MENU_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "menubase.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_MENUS
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/list.h"        // for "template" list classes
+#include "wx/window.h"      // base class for wxMenuBar
+
+// also include this one to ensure compatibility with old code which only
+// included wx/menu.h
+#include "wx/menuitem.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenu;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuBarBase;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuBar;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuItem;
+
+// pseudo template list classes
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_LIST(wxMenu, wxMenuList);
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_LIST(wxMenuItem, wxMenuItemList);
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// conditional compilation
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// having callbacks in menus is a wxWin 1.6x feature which should be replaced
+// with event tables in wxWin 2.xx code - however provide it because many
+// people like it a lot by default
+#ifndef wxUSE_MENU_CALLBACK
+    #if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+        #define wxUSE_MENU_CALLBACK 1
+    #else
+        #define wxUSE_MENU_CALLBACK 0
+    #endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+#endif // !defined(wxUSE_MENU_CALLBACK)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxMenu
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuBase : public wxEvtHandler
+{
+public:
+    // create a menu
+    static wxMenu *New(const wxString& title = wxEmptyString, long style = 0);
+
+    // ctors
+    wxMenuBase(const wxString& title, long style = 0) : m_title(title)
+        { Init(style); }
+    wxMenuBase(long style = 0)
+        { Init(style); }
+
+    // dtor deletes all the menu items we own
+    virtual ~wxMenuBase();
+
+    // menu construction
+    // -----------------
+
+    // append a normal item to the menu
+    void Append(int id,
+                const wxString& text,
+                const wxString& help = wxEmptyString,
+                bool isCheckable = FALSE)
+    {
+        DoAppend(wxMenuItem::New((wxMenu *)this, id, text, help, isCheckable));
+    }
+
+    // append a separator to the menu
+    void AppendSeparator() { Append(wxID_SEPARATOR, wxEmptyString); }
+
+    // append a submenu
+    void Append(int id,
+                const wxString& text,
+                wxMenu *submenu,
+                const wxString& help = wxEmptyString)
+    {
+        DoAppend(wxMenuItem::New((wxMenu *)this, id, text, help, FALSE, submenu));
+    }
+
+    // the most generic form of Append() - append anything
+    void Append(wxMenuItem *item) { DoAppend(item); }
+
+    // insert a break in the menu (only works when appending the items, not
+    // inserting them)
+    virtual void Break() { }
+
+    // insert an item before given position
+    bool Insert(size_t pos, wxMenuItem *item);
+    void Insert(size_t pos,
+                int id,
+                const wxString& text,
+                const wxString& help = wxEmptyString,
+                bool isCheckable = FALSE)
+    {
+        Insert(pos, wxMenuItem::New((wxMenu *)this, id, text, help, isCheckable));
+    }
+
+    // insert a separator
+    void InsertSeparator(size_t pos)
+    {
+        Insert(pos, wxMenuItem::New((wxMenu *)this));
+    }
+
+    // insert a submenu
+    void Insert(size_t pos,
+                int id,
+                const wxString& text,
+                wxMenu *submenu,
+                const wxString& help = wxEmptyString)
+    {
+        Insert(pos, wxMenuItem::New((wxMenu *)this, id, text, help, FALSE, submenu));
+    }
+
+    // prepend an item to the menu
+    void Prepend(wxMenuItem *item)
+    {
+        Insert(0u, item);
+    }
+
+    void Prepend(int id,
+                 const wxString& text,
+                 const wxString& help = wxEmptyString,
+                 bool isCheckable = FALSE)
+    {
+        Insert(0u, id, text, help, isCheckable);
+    }
+
+    // insert a separator
+    void PrependSeparator()
+    {
+        InsertSeparator(0u);
+    }
+
+    // insert a submenu
+    void Prepend(int id,
+                 const wxString& text,
+                 wxMenu *submenu,
+                 const wxString& help = wxEmptyString)
+    {
+        Insert(0u, id, text, submenu, help);
+    }
+
+    // detach an item from the menu, but don't delete it so that it can be
+    // added back later (but if it's not, the caller is responsible for
+    // deleting it!)
+    wxMenuItem *Remove(int id) { return Remove(FindChildItem(id)); }
+    wxMenuItem *Remove(wxMenuItem *item);
+
+    // delete an item from the menu (submenus are not destroyed by this
+    // function, see Destroy)
+    bool Delete(int id) { return Delete(FindChildItem(id)); }
+    bool Delete(wxMenuItem *item);
+
+    // delete the item from menu and destroy it (if it's a submenu)
+    bool Destroy(int id) { return Destroy(FindChildItem(id)); }
+    bool Destroy(wxMenuItem *item);
+
+    // menu items access
+    // -----------------
+
+    // get the items
+    size_t GetMenuItemCount() const { return m_items.GetCount(); }
+
+    const wxMenuItemList& GetMenuItems() const { return m_items; }
+    wxMenuItemList& GetMenuItems() { return m_items; }
+
+    // search
+    virtual int FindItem(const wxString& item) const;
+    wxMenuItem* FindItem(int id, wxMenu **menu = NULL) const;
+
+    // get/set items attributes
+    void Enable(int id, bool enable);
+    bool IsEnabled(int id) const;
+
+    void Check(int id, bool check);
+    bool IsChecked(int id) const;
+
+    void SetLabel(int id, const wxString& label);
+    wxString GetLabel(int id) const;
+
+    virtual void SetHelpString(int id, const wxString& helpString);
+    virtual wxString GetHelpString(int id) const;
+
+    // misc accessors
+    // --------------
+
+    // the title
+    virtual void SetTitle(const wxString& title) { m_title = title; }
+    const wxString GetTitle() const { return m_title; }
+
+    // client data
+    void SetClientData(void* clientData) { m_clientData = clientData; }
+    void* GetClientData() const { return m_clientData; }
+
+    // event handler
+    void SetEventHandler(wxEvtHandler *handler) { m_eventHandler = handler; }
+    wxEvtHandler *GetEventHandler() const { return m_eventHandler; }
+
+    // invoking window
+    void SetInvokingWindow(wxWindow *win) { m_invokingWindow = win; }
+    wxWindow *GetInvokingWindow() const { return m_invokingWindow; }
+
+    // style
+    long GetStyle() const { return m_style; }
+
+    // implementation helpers
+    // ----------------------
+
+    // Updates the UI for a menu and all submenus recursively. source is the
+    // object that has the update event handlers defined for it. If NULL, the
+    // menu or associated window will be used.
+    void UpdateUI(wxEvtHandler* source = (wxEvtHandler*)NULL);
+
+    // get the menu bar this menu is attached to (may be NULL, always NULL for
+    // popup menus)
+    wxMenuBar *GetMenuBar() const { return m_menuBar; }
+
+    // called when the menu is attached/detached to/from a menu bar
+    virtual void Attach(wxMenuBarBase *menubar);
+    virtual void Detach();
+
+    // is the menu attached to a menu bar (or is it a popup one)?
+    bool IsAttached() const { return m_menuBar != NULL; }
+
+    // set/get the parent of this menu
+    void SetParent(wxMenu *parent) { m_menuParent = parent; }
+    wxMenu *GetParent() const { return m_menuParent; }
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+    // compatibility: these functions are deprecated, use the new ones instead
+    bool Enabled(int id) const { return IsEnabled(id); }
+    bool Checked(int id) const { return IsChecked(id); }
+
+    wxMenuItem* FindItemForId(int itemId, wxMenu **itemMenu) const
+        { return FindItem(itemId, itemMenu); }
+
+    wxList& GetItems() const { return (wxList &)m_items; }
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+
+#if wxUSE_MENU_CALLBACK || defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    // wxWin 1.6x compatible menu event handling
+    wxFunction GetCallback() const { return m_callback; }
+    void Callback(const wxFunction func) { m_callback = func; }
+
+    wxFunction m_callback;
+#endif // wxUSE_MENU_CALLBACK
+
+    // unlike FindItem(), this function doesn't recurse but only looks through
+    // our direct children and also may return the index of the found child if
+    // pos != NULL
+    wxMenuItem *FindChildItem(int id, size_t *pos = NULL) const;
+
+    // called to generate a wxCommandEvent, return TRUE if it was processed,
+    // FALSE otherwise
+    //
+    // the checked parameter may have boolean value or -1 for uncheckable items
+    bool SendEvent(int id, int checked = -1);
+
+protected:
+    // virtuals to override in derived classes
+    // ---------------------------------------
+
+    virtual bool DoAppend(wxMenuItem *item);
+    virtual bool DoInsert(size_t pos, wxMenuItem *item);
+
+    virtual wxMenuItem *DoRemove(wxMenuItem *item);
+    virtual bool DoDelete(wxMenuItem *item);
+    virtual bool DoDestroy(wxMenuItem *item);
+
+    // helpers
+    // -------
+
+    // common part of all ctors
+    void Init(long style);
+
+    // associate the submenu with this menu
+    void AddSubMenu(wxMenu *submenu);
+
+    wxMenuBar     *m_menuBar;           // menubar we belong to or NULL
+    wxMenu        *m_menuParent;        // parent menu or NULL
+
+    wxString       m_title;             // the menu title or label
+    wxMenuItemList m_items;             // the list of menu items
+
+    wxWindow      *m_invokingWindow;    // for popup menus
+    void          *m_clientData;        // associated with the menu
+
+    long           m_style;             // combination of wxMENU_XXX flags
+
+    wxEvtHandler  *m_eventHandler;      // a pluggable in event handler
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxMenuBar
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuBarBase : public wxWindow
+{
+public:
+    // default ctor
+    wxMenuBarBase();
+
+    // dtor will delete all menus we own
+    virtual ~wxMenuBarBase();
+
+    // menu bar construction
+    // ---------------------
+
+    // append a menu to the end of menubar, return TRUE if ok
+    virtual bool Append(wxMenu *menu, const wxString& title);
+
+    // insert a menu before the given position into the menubar, return TRUE
+    // if inserted ok
+    virtual bool Insert(size_t pos, wxMenu *menu, const wxString& title);
+
+    // menu bar items access
+    // ---------------------
+
+    // get the number of menus in the menu bar
+    size_t GetMenuCount() const { return m_menus.GetCount(); }
+
+    // get the menu at given position
+    wxMenu *GetMenu(size_t pos) const;
+
+    // replace the menu at given position with another one, returns the
+    // previous menu (which should be deleted by the caller)
+    virtual wxMenu *Replace(size_t pos, wxMenu *menu, const wxString& title);
+
+    // delete the menu at given position from the menu bar, return the pointer
+    // to the menu (which should be  deleted by the caller)
+    virtual wxMenu *Remove(size_t pos);
+
+    // enable or disable a submenu
+    virtual void EnableTop(size_t pos, bool enable) = 0;
+
+    // is the menu enabled?
+    virtual bool IsEnabledTop(size_t WXUNUSED(pos)) const { return TRUE; }
+
+    // get or change the label of the menu at given position
+    virtual void SetLabelTop(size_t pos, const wxString& label) = 0;
+    virtual wxString GetLabelTop(size_t pos) const = 0;
+
+    // item search
+    // -----------
+
+    // by menu and item names, returns wxNOT_FOUND if not found or id of the
+    // found item
+    virtual int FindMenuItem(const wxString& menu, const wxString& item) const;
+
+    // find item by id (in any menu), returns NULL if not found
+    //
+    // if menu is !NULL, it will be filled with wxMenu this item belongs to
+    virtual wxMenuItem* FindItem(int id, wxMenu **menu = NULL) const;
+
+    // find menu by its caption, return wxNOT_FOUND on failure
+    int FindMenu(const wxString& title) const;
+
+    // item access
+    // -----------
+
+    // all these functions just use FindItem() and then call an appropriate
+    // method on it
+    //
+    // NB: under MSW, these methods can only be used after the menubar had
+    //     been attached to the frame
+
+    void Enable(int id, bool enable);
+    void Check(int id, bool check);
+    bool IsChecked(int id) const;
+    bool IsEnabled(int id) const;
+
+    void SetLabel(int id, const wxString &label);
+    wxString GetLabel(int id) const;
+
+    void SetHelpString(int id, const wxString& helpString);
+    wxString GetHelpString(int id) const;
+
+    // implementation helpers
+
+    // get the frame we are attached to (may return NULL)
+    wxFrame *GetFrame() const { return m_menuBarFrame; }
+
+    // returns TRUE if we're attached to a frame
+    bool IsAttached() const { return GetFrame() != NULL; }
+
+    // associate the menubar with the frame
+    virtual void Attach(wxFrame *frame);
+
+    // called before deleting the menubar normally
+    virtual void Detach();
+
+    // need to override these ones to avoid virtual function hiding
+    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE) { return wxWindow::Enable(enable); }
+    virtual void SetLabel(const wxString& s) { wxWindow::SetLabel(s); }
+    virtual wxString GetLabel() const { return wxWindow::GetLabel(); }
+
+    // don't want menu bars to accept the focus by tabbing to them
+    virtual bool AcceptsFocusFromKeyboard() const { return FALSE; }
+
+    // compatibility only: these functions are deprecated, use the new ones
+    // instead
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+    bool Enabled(int id) const { return IsEnabled(id); }
+    bool Checked(int id) const { return IsChecked(id); }
+
+    wxMenuItem* FindMenuItemById(int id) const
+        { return FindItem(id); }
+    wxMenuItem* FindItemForId(int id, wxMenu **menu = NULL) const
+        { return FindItem(id, menu); }
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+
+protected:
+    // the list of all our menus
+    wxMenuList m_menus;
+
+    // the frame we are attached to (may be NULL)
+    wxFrame *m_menuBarFrame;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the real class declaration
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY
+    #define wxMenuItem wxMenuItemBase
+#else // !wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/menu.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/menu.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/menu.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/menu.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/menu.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/menu.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/menu.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/menu.h"
+#endif
+#endif // wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY/!wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY
+
+#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_MENU_H_BASE_

include/wx/menuitem.h

@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/menuitem.h
+// Purpose:     wxMenuItem class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     25.10.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_MENUITEM_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_MENUITEM_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_MENUS
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/object.h"  // base class
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// forward declarations
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAcceleratorEntry;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuItem;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenu;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxMenuItem is an item in the menu which may be either a normal item, a sub
+// menu or a separator
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuItemBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    // creation
+    static wxMenuItem *New(wxMenu *parentMenu = (wxMenu *)NULL,
+                           int id = wxID_SEPARATOR,
+                           const wxString& text = wxEmptyString,
+                           const wxString& help = wxEmptyString,
+                           bool isCheckable = FALSE,
+                           wxMenu *subMenu = (wxMenu *)NULL);
+
+    // destruction: wxMenuItem will delete its submenu
+    virtual ~wxMenuItemBase();
+
+    // the menu we're in
+    wxMenu *GetMenu() const { return m_parentMenu; }
+
+    // get/set id
+    void SetId(int id) { m_id = id; }
+    int  GetId() const { return m_id; }
+    bool IsSeparator() const { return m_id == wxID_SEPARATOR; }
+
+    // the item's text (or name)
+    //
+    // NB: the item's text includes the accelerators and mnemonics info (if
+    //     any), i.e. it may contain '&' or '_' or "\t..." and thus is
+    //     different from the item's label which only contains the text shown
+    //     in the menu
+    virtual void SetText(const wxString& str) { m_text = str; }
+    wxString GetLabel() const { return GetLabelFromText(m_text); }
+    const wxString& GetText() const { return m_text; }
+
+    // get the label from text (implemented in platform-specific code)
+    static wxString GetLabelFromText(const wxString& text);
+
+    // what kind of menu item we are
+    virtual void SetCheckable(bool checkable) { m_isCheckable = checkable; }
+    bool IsCheckable() const { return m_isCheckable; }
+
+    bool IsSubMenu() const { return m_subMenu != NULL; }
+    void SetSubMenu(wxMenu *menu) { m_subMenu = menu; }
+    wxMenu *GetSubMenu() const { return m_subMenu; }
+
+    // state
+    virtual void Enable(bool enable = TRUE) { m_isEnabled = enable; }
+    virtual bool IsEnabled() const { return m_isEnabled; }
+
+    virtual void Check(bool check = TRUE) { m_isChecked = check; }
+    virtual bool IsChecked() const { return m_isChecked; }
+    void Toggle() { Check(!m_isChecked); }
+
+    // help string (displayed in the status bar by default)
+    void SetHelp(const wxString& str) { m_help = str; }
+    const wxString& GetHelp() const { return m_help; }
+
+#if wxUSE_ACCEL
+    // extract the accelerator from the given menu string, return NULL if none
+    // found
+    static wxAcceleratorEntry *GetAccelFromString(const wxString& label);
+
+    // get our accelerator or NULL (caller must delete the pointer)
+    virtual wxAcceleratorEntry *GetAccel() const;
+
+    // set the accel for this item - this may also be done indirectly with
+    // SetText()
+    virtual void SetAccel(wxAcceleratorEntry *accel);
+#endif // wxUSE_ACCEL
+
+    // compatibility only, use new functions in the new code
+    void SetName(const wxString& str) { SetText(str); }
+    const wxString& GetName() const { return GetText(); }
+
+protected:
+    int           m_id;             // numeric id of the item >= 0 or -1
+    wxMenu       *m_parentMenu,     // the menu we belong to
+                 *m_subMenu;        // our sub menu or NULL
+    wxString      m_text,           // label of the item
+                  m_help;           // the help string for the item
+    bool          m_isCheckable;    // can be checked?
+    bool          m_isChecked;      // is checked?
+    bool          m_isEnabled;      // is enabled?
+
+    // some compilers need a default constructor here, do not remove
+    wxMenuItemBase() { }
+
+private:
+    // and, if we have one ctor, compiler won't generate a default copy one, so
+    // declare them ourselves - but don't implement as they shouldn't be used
+    wxMenuItemBase(const wxMenuItemBase& item);
+    wxMenuItemBase& operator=(const wxMenuItemBase& item);
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the real class declaration
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY
+    #define wxMenuItem wxMenuItemBase
+#else // !wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/menuitem.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/menuitem.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/menuitem.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/menuitem.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/menuitem.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/menuitem.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/menuitem.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/menuitem.h"
+#endif
+#endif // wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY/!wxUSE_BASE_CLASSES_ONLY
+
+#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_MENUITEM_H_BASE_

include/wx/msgdlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+#ifndef _WX_MSGDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_MSGDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_MSGDLG
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+#include "wx/generic/msgdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/msgdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/msgdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/msgdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/generic/msgdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/msgdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/msgdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/generic/msgdlgg.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxMessageBox: the simplest way to use wxMessageDialog
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+int WXDLLEXPORT wxMessageBox(const wxString& message,
+                            const wxString& caption = wxMessageBoxCaptionStr,
+                            long style = wxOK | wxCENTRE,
+                            wxWindow *parent = NULL,
+                            int x = -1, int y = -1);
+
+#endif // wxUSE_MSGDLG
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_MSGDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/notebook.h

@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/notebook.h
+// Purpose:     wxNotebook interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01.02.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996-2000 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_NOTEBOOK_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_NOTEBOOK_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "notebookbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_NOTEBOOK
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+#include "wx/dynarray.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxImageList;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// types
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// array of notebook pages
+typedef wxWindow wxNotebookPage;  // so far, any window can be a page
+
+WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY(wxNotebookPage *, wxArrayPages);
+
+#define wxNOTEBOOK_NAME _T("notebook")
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxNotebookBase: define wxNotebook interface
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxNotebookBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // ctor
+    wxNotebookBase()
+    {
+        Init();
+    }
+
+    // quasi ctor
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                wxWindowID id,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                long style = 0,
+                const wxString& name = wxNOTEBOOK_NAME);
+
+    // dtor
+    virtual ~wxNotebookBase();
+
+    // accessors
+    // ---------
+
+    // get number of pages in the dialog
+    int GetPageCount() const { return m_pages.GetCount(); }
+
+    // get the panel which represents the given page
+    wxNotebookPage *GetPage(int nPage) { return m_pages[nPage]; }
+
+    // get the currently selected page
+    virtual int GetSelection() const = 0;
+
+    // set/get the title of a page
+    virtual bool SetPageText(int nPage, const wxString& strText) = 0;
+    virtual wxString GetPageText(int nPage) const = 0;
+
+    // image list stuff: each page may have an image associated with it (all
+    // images belong to the same image list)
+    virtual void SetImageList(wxImageList* imageList);
+
+    // as SetImageList() but we will delete the image list ourselves
+    void AssignImageList(wxImageList* imageList);
+
+    // get pointer (may be NULL) to the associated image list
+    wxImageList* GetImageList() const { return m_imageList; }
+
+    // sets/returns item's image index in the current image list
+    virtual int GetPageImage(int nPage) const = 0;
+    virtual bool SetPageImage(int nPage, int nImage) = 0;
+
+    // get the number of rows for a control with wxNB_MULTILINE style (not all
+    // versions support it - they will always return 1 then)
+    virtual int GetRowCount() const { return 1; }
+
+    // set the size (the same for all pages)
+    virtual void SetPageSize(const wxSize& size) = 0;
+
+    // set the padding between tabs (in pixels)
+    virtual void SetPadding(const wxSize& padding) = 0;
+
+    // set the size of the tabs for wxNB_FIXEDWIDTH controls
+    virtual void SetTabSize(const wxSize& sz) = 0;
+
+    // calculate the size of the notebook from the size of its page
+    virtual wxSize CalcSizeFromPage(const wxSize& sizePage);
+
+    // operations
+    // ----------
+
+    // remove one page from the notebook and delete it
+    virtual bool DeletePage(int nPage);
+
+    // remove one page from the notebook, without deleting it
+    virtual bool RemovePage(int nPage) { return DoRemovePage(nPage) != NULL; }
+
+    // remove all pages and delete them
+    virtual bool DeleteAllPages() { WX_CLEAR_ARRAY(m_pages); return TRUE; }
+
+    // adds a new page to the notebook (it will be deleted by the notebook,
+    // don't delete it yourself) and make it the current one if bSelect
+    virtual bool AddPage(wxNotebookPage *pPage,
+                         const wxString& strText,
+                         bool bSelect = FALSE,
+                         int imageId = -1)
+    {
+        return InsertPage(GetPageCount(), pPage, strText, bSelect, imageId);
+    }
+
+    // the same as AddPage(), but adds the page at the specified position
+    virtual bool InsertPage(int nPage,
+                            wxNotebookPage *pPage,
+                            const wxString& strText,
+                            bool bSelect = FALSE,
+                            int imageId = -1) = 0;
+
+    // set the currently selected page, return the index of the previously
+    // selected one (or -1 on error)
+    //
+    // NB: this function will _not_ generate wxEVT_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_xxx events
+    virtual int SetSelection(int nPage) = 0;
+
+    // cycle thru the tabs
+    void AdvanceSelection(bool forward = TRUE)
+    {
+        int nPage = GetNextPage(forward);
+        if ( nPage != -1 )
+            SetSelection(nPage);
+    }
+
+protected:
+    // remove the page and return a pointer to it
+    virtual wxNotebookPage *DoRemovePage(int page);
+
+    // common part of all ctors
+    void Init();
+
+    // get the next page wrapping if we reached the end
+    int GetNextPage(bool forward) const;
+
+    wxArrayPages  m_pages;      // array of pages
+    wxImageList  *m_imageList;  // we can have an associated image list
+    bool m_ownsImageList;       // true if we must delete m_imageList
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// notebook event class (used by NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGED/ING events)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxNotebookEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
+{
+public:
+    wxNotebookEvent(wxEventType commandType = wxEVT_NULL, int id = 0,
+                    int nSel = -1, int nOldSel = -1)
+        : wxNotifyEvent(commandType, id)
+        {
+            m_nSel = nSel;
+            m_nOldSel = nOldSel;
+        }
+
+    // accessors
+        // the currently selected page (-1 if none)
+    int GetSelection() const { return m_nSel; }
+    void SetSelection(int nSel) { m_nSel = nSel; }
+        // the page that was selected before the change (-1 if none)
+    int GetOldSelection() const { return m_nOldSel; }
+    void SetOldSelection(int nOldSel) { m_nOldSel = nOldSel; }
+
+private:
+    int m_nSel,     // currently selected page
+        m_nOldSel;  // previously selected page
+
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxNotebookEvent)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// event types and macros for them
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__BORLANDC__) && defined(__WIN16__)
+    // For 16-bit BC++, these 2 would be identical otherwise (truncated)
+    #define wxEVT_COMMAND_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGED wxEVT_COMMAND_NB_PAGE_CHANGED
+    #define wxEVT_COMMAND_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGING wxEVT_COMMAND_NB_PAGE_CHANGING
+#endif
+
+BEGIN_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGED, 802)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGING, 803)
+END_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+
+typedef void (wxEvtHandler::*wxNotebookEventFunction)(wxNotebookEvent&);
+
+// Truncation in 16-bit BC++ means we need to define these differently
+#if defined(__BORLANDC__) && defined(__WIN16__)
+#define EVT_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGED(id, fn)                                   \
+  DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(                                                \
+    wxEVT_COMMAND_NB_PAGE_CHANGED,                                          \
+    id,                                                                     \
+    -1,                                                                     \
+    (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxNotebookEventFunction) &fn,  \
+    NULL                                                                    \
+  ),
+
+#define EVT_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGING(id, fn)                                  \
+  DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(                                                \
+    wxEVT_COMMAND_NB_PAGE_CHANGING,                                         \
+    id,                                                                     \
+    -1,                                                                     \
+    (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxNotebookEventFunction) &fn,  \
+    NULL                                                                    \
+  ),
+
+#else
+
+#define EVT_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGED(id, fn)                                   \
+  DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(                                                \
+    wxEVT_COMMAND_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGED,                                    \
+    id,                                                                     \
+    -1,                                                                     \
+    (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxNotebookEventFunction) &fn,  \
+    NULL                                                                    \
+  ),
+
+#define EVT_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGING(id, fn)                                  \
+  DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(                                                \
+    wxEVT_COMMAND_NOTEBOOK_PAGE_CHANGING,                                   \
+    id,                                                                     \
+    -1,                                                                     \
+    (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxNotebookEventFunction) &fn,  \
+    NULL                                                                    \
+  ),
+
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxNotebook class itself
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/notebook.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #ifdef __WIN16__
+        #include  "wx/generic/notebook.h"
+    #else
+        #include  "wx/msw/notebook.h"
+    #endif
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include  "wx/generic/notebook.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include  "wx/gtk/notebook.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include  "wx/qt/notebook.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include  "wx/mac/notebook.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include  "wx/os2/notebook.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include  "wx/stubs/notebook.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_NOTEBOOK
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_NOTEBOOK_H_BASE_

include/wx/palette.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_PALETTE_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_PALETTE_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/palette.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/palette.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/paletteg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/palette.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/palette.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/palette.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/palette.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/palette.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_PALETTE_H_BASE_

include/wx/pen.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_PEN_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_PEN_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/pen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/pen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/pen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/pen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/pen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/pen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/pen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/pen.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_PEN_H_BASE_

include/wx/printdlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+#ifndef _WX_PRINTDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_PRINTDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/printdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/generic/prntdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/prntdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/generic/prntdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/printdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/generic/prntdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/generic/prntdlgg.h"
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(__WXMSW__) && !defined(__WXMAC__)
+#define wxPrintDialog wxGenericPrintDialog
+#define sm_classwxPrintDialog sm_classwxGenericPrintDialog
+
+#define wxPrintSetupDialog wxGenericPrintSetupDialog
+#define sm_classwxPrintSetupDialog sm_classwxGenericPrintSetupDialog
+
+#define wxPageSetupDialog wxGenericPageSetupDialog
+#define sm_classwxPageSetupDialog sm_classwxGenericPageSetupDialog
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_PRINTDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/radiobox.h

@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/radiobox.h
+// Purpose:     wxRadioBox declaration
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     10.09.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_RADIOBOX_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_RADIOBOX_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "radioboxbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_RADIOBOX
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxRadioBoxNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxRadioBoxBase is not a normal base class, but rather a mix-in because the
+// real wxRadioBox derives from different classes on different platforms: for
+// example, it is a wxStaticBox in wxUniv but not in wxMSW
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxRadioBoxBase
+{
+public:
+    // selection
+    virtual void SetSelection(int n) = 0;
+    virtual int GetSelection() const = 0;
+
+    virtual wxString GetStringSelection() const
+    {
+        wxString s;
+        int sel = GetSelection();
+        if ( sel != wxNOT_FOUND )
+            s = GetString(sel);
+
+        return s;
+    }
+
+    virtual bool SetStringSelection(const wxString& s)
+    {
+        int sel = FindString(s);
+        if ( sel != wxNOT_FOUND )
+        {
+            SetSelection(sel);
+
+            return TRUE;
+        }
+
+        return FALSE;
+    }
+
+    // string access
+    virtual int GetCount() const = 0;
+    virtual int FindString(const wxString& s) const
+    {
+        int count = GetCount();
+        for ( int n = 0; n < count; n++ )
+        {
+            if ( GetString(n) == s )
+                return n;
+        }
+
+        return wxNOT_FOUND;
+    }
+
+    virtual wxString GetString(int n) const = 0;
+    virtual void SetString(int n, const wxString& label) = 0;
+
+    // change the individual radio button state
+    virtual void Enable(int n, bool enable = TRUE) = 0;
+    virtual void Show(int n, bool show = TRUE) = 0;
+
+    // layout parameters
+    virtual int GetColumnCount() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetRowCount() const = 0;
+
+    // return the item above/below/to the left/right of the given one
+    int GetNextItem(int item, wxDirection dir, long style) const;
+
+    // for compatibility only, don't use these methods in new code!
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+    int Number() const { return GetCount(); }
+    wxString GetLabel(int n) const { return GetString(n); }
+    void SetLabel(int n, const wxString& label) { SetString(n, label); }
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/radiobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/radiobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/radiobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/radiobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/radiobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/radiobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/radiobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/radiobox.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_RADIOBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_RADIOBOX_H_BASE_

include/wx/radiobut.h

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/radiobut.h
+// Purpose:     wxRadioButton declaration
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     07.09.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_RADIOBUT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_RADIOBUT_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_RADIOBTN
+
+/*
+   There is no wxRadioButtonBase class as wxRadioButton interface is the same
+   as of wxCheckBox(Base), but under some platforms wxRadioButton really
+   derives from wxCheckBox and on the others it doesn't.
+
+   The pseudo-declaration of wxRadioButtonBase would look like this:
+
+   class wxRadioButtonBase : public ...
+   {
+   public:
+        virtual void SetValue(bool value);
+        virtual bool GetValue() const;
+   };
+ */
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxRadioButtonNameStr;
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/radiobut.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/radiobut.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/radiobut.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/radiobut.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/radiobut.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/radiobut.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/radiobut.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/radiobut.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_RADIOBTN
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_RADIOBUT_H_BASE_

include/wx/region.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_REGION_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_REGION_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/region.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/region.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/region.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/region.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/region.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/region.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/region.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/region.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_REGION_H_BASE_

include/wx/scrolbar.h

@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+#ifndef _WX_SCROLBAR_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_SCROLBAR_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_SCROLLBAR
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxScrollBarNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxScrollBar: a scroll bar control
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxScrollBarBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // scrollbar construction
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                wxWindowID id,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                long style = wxSB_HORIZONTAL,
+                const wxValidator& validator = wxDefaultValidator,
+                const wxString& name = wxScrollBarNameStr);
+
+    // accessors
+    virtual int GetThumbPosition() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetThumbSize() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetPageSize() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetRange() const = 0;
+
+    bool IsVertical() const { return (m_windowStyle & wxVERTICAL) != 0; }
+
+    // operations
+    virtual void SetThumbPosition(int viewStart) = 0;
+    virtual void SetScrollbar(int position, int thumbSize,
+                              int range, int pageSize,
+                              bool refresh = TRUE) = 0;
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/scrolbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/scrolbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/scrolbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/scrolbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/scrolbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/scrolbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/scrolbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/scrolbar.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_SCROLLBAR
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_SCROLBAR_H_BASE_

include/wx/settings.h

@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        settings.h
+// Purpose:     wxSystemSettings defines; includes platform settings.h
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart and Markus Holzem
+// Licence:   	wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_SETTINGS_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_SETTINGS_H_BASE_
+
+#define wxSYS_WHITE_BRUSH         0
+#define wxSYS_LTGRAY_BRUSH        1
+#define wxSYS_GRAY_BRUSH          2
+#define wxSYS_DKGRAY_BRUSH        3
+#define wxSYS_BLACK_BRUSH         4
+#define wxSYS_NULL_BRUSH          5
+#define wxSYS_HOLLOW_BRUSH        wxSYS_NULL_BRUSH
+#define wxSYS_WHITE_PEN           6
+#define wxSYS_BLACK_PEN           7
+#define wxSYS_NULL_PEN            8
+#define wxSYS_OEM_FIXED_FONT      10
+#define wxSYS_ANSI_FIXED_FONT     11
+#define wxSYS_ANSI_VAR_FONT       12
+#define wxSYS_SYSTEM_FONT         13
+#define wxSYS_DEVICE_DEFAULT_FONT 14
+#define wxSYS_DEFAULT_PALETTE     15
+#define wxSYS_SYSTEM_FIXED_FONT   16
+#define wxSYS_DEFAULT_GUI_FONT    17
+
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_SCROLLBAR         0
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_BACKGROUND        1
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_ACTIVECAPTION     2
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_INACTIVECAPTION   3
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_MENU              4
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_WINDOW            5
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_WINDOWFRAME       6
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_MENUTEXT          7
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_WINDOWTEXT        8
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_CAPTIONTEXT       9
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_ACTIVEBORDER      10
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_INACTIVEBORDER    11
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_APPWORKSPACE      12
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_HIGHLIGHT         13
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_HIGHLIGHTTEXT     14
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNFACE           15
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNSHADOW         16
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_GRAYTEXT          17
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNTEXT           18
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_INACTIVECAPTIONTEXT 19
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNHIGHLIGHT      20
+
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_3DDKSHADOW        21
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_3DLIGHT           22
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_INFOTEXT          23
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_INFOBK            24
+
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_LISTBOX           25
+
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_DESKTOP           wxSYS_COLOUR_BACKGROUND
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_3DFACE            wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNFACE
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_3DSHADOW          wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNSHADOW
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_3DHIGHLIGHT       wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNHIGHLIGHT
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_3DHILIGHT         wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNHIGHLIGHT
+#define wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNHILIGHT        wxSYS_COLOUR_BTNHIGHLIGHT
+
+// Metrics
+#define wxSYS_MOUSE_BUTTONS           1
+#define wxSYS_BORDER_X                2
+#define wxSYS_BORDER_Y                3
+#define wxSYS_CURSOR_X                4
+#define wxSYS_CURSOR_Y                5
+#define wxSYS_DCLICK_X                6
+#define wxSYS_DCLICK_Y                7
+#define wxSYS_DRAG_X                  8
+#define wxSYS_DRAG_Y                  9
+#define wxSYS_EDGE_X                  10
+#define wxSYS_EDGE_Y                  11
+#define wxSYS_HSCROLL_ARROW_X         12
+#define wxSYS_HSCROLL_ARROW_Y         13
+#define wxSYS_HTHUMB_X                14
+#define wxSYS_ICON_X                  15
+#define wxSYS_ICON_Y                  16
+#define wxSYS_ICONSPACING_X           17
+#define wxSYS_ICONSPACING_Y           18
+#define wxSYS_WINDOWMIN_X             19
+#define wxSYS_WINDOWMIN_Y             20
+#define wxSYS_SCREEN_X                21
+#define wxSYS_SCREEN_Y                22
+#define wxSYS_FRAMESIZE_X             23
+#define wxSYS_FRAMESIZE_Y             24
+#define wxSYS_SMALLICON_X             25
+#define wxSYS_SMALLICON_Y             26
+#define wxSYS_HSCROLL_Y               27
+#define wxSYS_VSCROLL_X               28
+#define wxSYS_VSCROLL_ARROW_X         29
+#define wxSYS_VSCROLL_ARROW_Y         30
+#define wxSYS_VTHUMB_Y                31
+#define wxSYS_CAPTION_Y               32
+#define wxSYS_MENU_Y                  33
+#define wxSYS_NETWORK_PRESENT         34
+#define wxSYS_PENWINDOWS_PRESENT      35
+#define wxSYS_SHOW_SOUNDS             36
+#define wxSYS_SWAP_BUTTONS            37
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/settings.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/settings.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/settings.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/settings.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/settings.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/settings.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/settings.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/settings.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_SETTINGS_H_BASE_
+

include/wx/setup.h

@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+ * The main configuration file for wxWindows.
+ *
+ * NB: this file can be included in .c files, so it must be compileable by a C
+ *     compiler - use #ifdef __cplusplus for C++ specific features and avoid
+ *     using C++ style comments
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WX_SETUP_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_SETUP_H_BASE_
+
+/* compatibility code, to be removed asap: */
+
+#if !defined(__WXBASE__) && !defined(__WXMSW__) && !defined(__WXGTK__) && !defined(__WXMOTIF__) && !defined(__WXQT__) && !defined(__WXSTUBS__) && !defined(__WXMAC__) && !defined(__WXPM__)
+#error No __WXxxx__ define set! Please define one of __WXBASE__,__WXGTK__,__WXMSW__,__WXMOTIF__,__WXMAC__,__WXQT__,__WXPM__,__WXSTUBS__
+#endif
+
+/*
+  wxUniversal is defined together with one of other ports, so test for it
+  first
+ */
+#ifdef __WXUNIVERSAL__
+#if defined(__USE_WXCONFIG__) && defined(__WXDEBUG__)
+#include "wx/univd/setup.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/univ/setup.h"
+#endif
+
+#elif defined(__WXBASE__)
+#if defined(__USE_WXCONFIG__) && defined(__WXDEBUG__)
+#include "wx/based/setup.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/base/setup.h"
+#endif
+
+#elif defined(__VMS)
+#include "wx_root:[wxwindows]setup.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/setup.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/setup.h"
+
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#if defined(__USE_WXCONFIG__) && defined(__WXDEBUG__)
+#include "wx/qtd/setup.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/qt/setup.h"
+#endif
+
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#if defined(__USE_WXCONFIG__) && defined(__WXDEBUG__)
+#include "wx/motifd/setup.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/motif/setup.h"
+#endif
+
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/setup.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/setup.h"
+
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#if defined(__USE_WXCONFIG__) && defined(__WXDEBUG__)
+#include "wx/gtkd/setup.h"
+#else
+#include "wx/gtk/setup.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/chkconf.h"
+
+/*
+   define some constants identifying wxWindows version in more details than
+   just the version number
+ */
+
+// wxLogChain class available
+#define wxHAS_LOG_CHAIN
+
+// define this when wxDC::Blit() respects SetDeviceOrigin() in wxGTK
+#undef wxHAS_WORKING_GTK_DC_BLIT
+
+#endif /* _WX_SETUP_H_BASE_ */

include/wx/slider.h

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/slider.h
+// Purpose:     wxSlider interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     09.02.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996-2001 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_SLIDER_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_SLIDER_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_SLIDER
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxSliderNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxSliderBase: define wxSlider interface
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxSliderBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    /* the ctor of the derived class should have the following form:
+
+    wxSlider(wxWindow *parent,
+             wxWindowID id,
+             int value, int minValue, int maxValue,
+             const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+             const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+             long style = wxSL_HORIZONTAL,
+             const wxValidator& validator = wxDefaultValidator,
+             const wxString& name = wxSliderNameStr);
+    */
+
+    // get/set the current slider value (should be in range)
+    virtual int GetValue() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetValue(int value) = 0;
+
+    // retrieve/change the range
+    virtual void SetRange(int minValue, int maxValue) = 0;
+    virtual int GetMin() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetMax() const = 0;
+
+    // the line/page size is the increment by which the slider moves when
+    // cursor arrow key/page up or down are pressed (clicking the mouse is like
+    // pressing PageUp/Down) and are by default set to 1 and 1/10 of the range
+    virtual void SetLineSize(int lineSize) = 0;
+    virtual void SetPageSize(int pageSize) = 0;
+    virtual int GetLineSize() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetPageSize() const = 0;
+
+    // these methods get/set the length of the slider pointer in pixels
+    virtual void SetThumbLength(int lenPixels) = 0;
+    virtual int GetThumbLength() const = 0;
+
+    // warning: most of subsequent methods are currently only implemented in
+    //          wxMSW under Win95 and are silently ignored on other platforms
+
+    virtual void SetTickFreq(int WXUNUSED(n), int WXUNUSED(pos)) { }
+    virtual int GetTickFreq() const { return 0; }
+    virtual void ClearTicks() { }
+    virtual void SetTick(int WXUNUSED(tickPos)) { }
+
+    virtual void ClearSel() { }
+    virtual int GetSelEnd() const { return GetMin(); }
+    virtual int GetSelStart() const { return GetMax(); }
+    virtual void SetSelection(int WXUNUSED(min), int WXUNUSED(max)) { }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the real class declaration
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/slider.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #ifdef __WIN95__
+        #include "wx/msw/slider95.h"
+        #define wxSlider wxSlider95
+        #define sm_classwxSlider sm_classwxSlider95
+    #else // Win16
+        #include "wx/msw/slidrmsw.h"
+        #define wxSlider wxSliderMSW
+        #define sm_classwxSlider sm_classwxSliderMSW
+    #endif // Win32/Win16
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/slider.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/slider.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/slider.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/slider.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/slider.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/slider.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_SLIDER
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_SLIDER_H_BASE_

include/wx/spinbutt.h

@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/spinbutt.h
+// Purpose:     wxSpinButtonBase class
+// Author:      Julian Smart, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     23.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_SPINBUTT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_SPINBUTT_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_SPINBTN
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+#include "wx/event.h"
+
+#define wxSPIN_BUTTON_NAME _T("wxSpinButton")
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//  The wxSpinButton is like a small scrollbar than is often placed next
+//  to a text control.
+//
+//  Styles:
+//  wxSP_HORIZONTAL:   horizontal spin button
+//  wxSP_VERTICAL:     vertical spin button (the default)
+//  wxSP_ARROW_KEYS:   arrow keys increment/decrement value
+//  wxSP_WRAP:         value wraps at either end
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxSpinButtonBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    wxSpinButtonBase() { InitBase(); }
+
+    // accessors
+    virtual int GetValue() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetMin() const { return m_min; }
+    virtual int GetMax() const { return m_max; }
+
+    // operations
+    virtual void SetValue(int val) = 0;
+    virtual void SetRange(int minVal, int maxVal)
+    {
+        m_min = minVal;
+        m_max = maxVal;
+    }
+
+    // is this spin button vertically oriented?
+    bool IsVertical() const { return (m_windowStyle & wxSP_VERTICAL) != 0; }
+
+protected:
+    // init the base part of the control
+    void InitBase()
+    {
+        m_min = 0;
+        m_max = 100;
+    }
+
+    // the range value
+    int   m_min;
+    int   m_max;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the declaration of the real class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/spinbutt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__) && defined(__WIN95__)
+    #include "wx/msw/spinbutt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/spinbutt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/spinbutt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/spinbutt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/spinbutt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/spinbutt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/spinbutt.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// the wxSpinButton event
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxSpinEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
+{
+public:
+    wxSpinEvent(wxEventType commandType = wxEVT_NULL, int id = 0)
+           : wxNotifyEvent(commandType, id)
+    {
+    }
+
+    // get the current value of the control
+    int GetPosition() const { return m_commandInt; }
+    void SetPosition(int pos) { m_commandInt = pos; }
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxSpinEvent)
+};
+
+typedef void (wxEvtHandler::*wxSpinEventFunction)(wxSpinEvent&);
+
+// macros for handling spin events
+#define EVT_SPIN_UP(id, func) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_SCROLL_LINEUP, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxSpinEventFunction) & func, NULL ),
+#define EVT_SPIN_DOWN(id, func) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_SCROLL_LINEDOWN, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxSpinEventFunction) & func, NULL ),
+#define EVT_SPIN(id, func) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_SCROLL_THUMBTRACK, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxSpinEventFunction) & func, NULL ),
+
+#endif // wxUSE_SPINBTN
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_SPINBUTT_H_BASE_

include/wx/statbmp.h

@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/statbmp.h
+// Purpose:     wxStaticBitmap class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     25.08.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_STATBMP_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_STATBMP_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "statbmpbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_STATBMP
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+#include "wx/bitmap.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxIcon;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmap;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxStaticBitmapNameStr;
+
+// a control showing an icon or a bitmap
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxStaticBitmapBase : public wxControl
+{
+ public:
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    ~wxStaticBitmapBase() { }
+#endif
+    
+    // our interface
+    virtual void SetIcon(const wxIcon& icon) = 0;
+    virtual void SetBitmap(const wxBitmap& bitmap) = 0;
+    virtual wxBitmap GetBitmap() const = 0;
+
+    // overriden base class virtuals
+    virtual bool AcceptsFocus() const { return FALSE; }
+
+protected:
+    virtual wxSize DoGetBestClientSize() const;
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/statbmp.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/statbmp.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/statbmp.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/statbmp.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/statbmp.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/statbmp.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/statbmp.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/statbmp.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_STATBMP
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_STATBMP_H_BASE_

include/wx/statbox.h

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+#ifndef _WX_STATBOX_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_STATBOX_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_STATBOX
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxStaticBoxNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxStaticBox: a grouping box with a label
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxStaticBoxBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // overriden base class virtuals
+    virtual bool AcceptsFocus() const { return FALSE; }
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+#include "wx/univ/statbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/statbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/statbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/statbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/statbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/statbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/statbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/statbox.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_STATBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_STATBOX_H_BASE_

include/wx/stattext.h

@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#ifndef _WX_STATTEXT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_STATTEXT_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_STATTEXT
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxStaticTextNameStr;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxStaticTextBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // overriden base class virtuals
+    virtual bool AcceptsFocus() const { return FALSE; }
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/stattext.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/stattext.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/stattext.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/stattext.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/stattext.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/stattext.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/stattext.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/stattext.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_STATTEXT
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_STATTEXT_H_BASE_

include/wx/taskbar.h

@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+#ifndef _WX_TASKBAR_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_TASKBAR_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/taskbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/taskbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/taskbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/taskbar.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#include "wx/stubs/taskbar.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_TASKBAR_H_BASE_

include/wx/textctrl.h

@@ -0,0 +1,345 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        textctrl.h
+// Purpose:     wxTextCtrlBase class - the interface of wxTextCtrl
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     13.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_TEXTCTRL_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_TEXTCTRL_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "textctrlbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_TEXTCTRL
+
+#include "wx/control.h"         // the base class
+
+// 16-bit Borland 4.0 doesn't seem to allow multiple inheritance with wxWindow
+// and streambuf: it complains about deriving a huge class from the huge class
+// streambuf. !! Also, can't use streambuf if making or using a DLL :-(
+
+#if (defined(__BORLANDC__)) || defined(__MWERKS__) || defined(_WINDLL) || defined(WXUSINGDLL) || defined(WXMAKINGDLL)
+    #define NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+#endif
+
+// the streambuf which is used in the declaration of wxTextCtrlBase below is not compatible
+// with the standard-conforming implementation found in newer egcs versions
+// (that is, the libstdc++ v3 that is shipped with it)
+#if defined(__GNUC__)&&( (__GNUC__>2) ||( (__GNUC__==2)&&(__GNUC_MINOR__>97) ) )
+    #define NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+#endif
+
+#ifndef NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+    #if wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM
+        #include "wx/ioswrap.h"    // for iostream classes if we need them
+    #else // !wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM
+        // can't compile this feature in if we don't use streams at all
+        #define NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+    #endif // wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM/!wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextCtrl;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxTextCtrlNameStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxEmptyString;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTextCtrl style flags
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// the flag bits 0x0001, 2, 4 and 8 are free but should be used only for the
+// things which don't make sense for a text control used by wxTextEntryDialog
+// because they would otherwise conflict with wxOK, wxCANCEL, wxCENTRE
+#define wxTE_READONLY       0x0010
+#define wxTE_MULTILINE      0x0020
+#define wxTE_PROCESS_TAB    0x0040
+
+// this style means to use RICHEDIT control and does something only under wxMSW
+// and Win32 and is silently ignored under all other platforms
+#define wxTE_RICH           0x0080
+#define wxTE_NO_VSCROLL     0x0100
+#define wxTE_AUTO_SCROLL    0x0200
+#define wxTE_PROCESS_ENTER  0x0400
+#define wxTE_PASSWORD       0x0800
+
+// automatically detect the URLs and generate the events when mouse is
+// moved/clicked over an URL
+//
+// this is for Win32 richedit controls only so far
+#define wxTE_AUTO_URL       0x1000
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTextAttr: a structure containing the visual attributes of a text
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextAttr
+{
+public:
+    // ctors
+    wxTextAttr() { }
+    wxTextAttr(const wxColour& colText,
+               const wxColour& colBack = wxNullColour,
+               const wxFont& font = wxNullFont)
+        : m_colText(colText), m_colBack(colBack), m_font(font) { }
+
+    // setters
+    void SetTextColour(const wxColour& colText) { m_colText = colText; }
+    void SetBackgroundColour(const wxColour& colBack) { m_colBack = colBack; }
+    void SetFont(const wxFont& font) { m_font = font; }
+
+    // accessors
+    bool HasTextColour() const { return m_colText.Ok(); }
+    bool HasBackgroundColour() const { return m_colBack.Ok(); }
+    bool HasFont() const { return m_font.Ok(); }
+
+    // setters
+    const wxColour& GetTextColour() const { return m_colText; }
+    const wxColour& GetBackgroundColour() const { return m_colBack; }
+    const wxFont& GetFont() const { return m_font; }
+
+    // returns false if we have any attributes set, true otherwise
+    bool IsDefault() const
+    {
+        return !HasTextColour() && !HasBackgroundColour() && !HasFont();
+    }
+
+private:
+    wxColour m_colText,
+             m_colBack;
+    wxFont   m_font;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTextCtrl: a single or multiple line text zone where user can enter and
+// edit text
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextCtrlBase : public wxControl
+#ifndef NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+                                 , public wxSTD streambuf
+#endif
+
+{
+public:
+    // creation
+    // --------
+
+    wxTextCtrlBase();
+    ~wxTextCtrlBase();
+
+    // accessors
+    // ---------
+
+    virtual wxString GetValue() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetValue(const wxString& value) = 0;
+
+    virtual int GetLineLength(long lineNo) const = 0;
+    virtual wxString GetLineText(long lineNo) const = 0;
+    virtual int GetNumberOfLines() const = 0;
+
+    virtual bool IsModified() const = 0;
+    virtual bool IsEditable() const = 0;
+
+    // If the return values from and to are the same, there is no selection.
+    virtual void GetSelection(long* from, long* to) const = 0;
+
+    // operations
+    // ----------
+
+    // editing
+    virtual void Clear() = 0;
+    virtual void Replace(long from, long to, const wxString& value) = 0;
+    virtual void Remove(long from, long to) = 0;
+
+    // load/save the controls contents from/to the file
+    virtual bool LoadFile(const wxString& file);
+    virtual bool SaveFile(const wxString& file = wxEmptyString);
+
+    // clears the dirty flag
+    virtual void DiscardEdits() = 0;
+
+    // set the max number of characters which may be entered in a single line
+    // text control
+    virtual void SetMaxLength(unsigned long WXUNUSED(len)) { }
+
+    // writing text inserts it at the current position, appending always
+    // inserts it at the end
+    virtual void WriteText(const wxString& text) = 0;
+    virtual void AppendText(const wxString& text) = 0;
+
+    // text control under some platforms supports the text styles: these
+    // methods allow to apply the given text style to the given selection or to
+    // set/get the style which will be used for all appended text
+    virtual bool SetStyle(long start, long end, const wxTextAttr& style);
+    virtual bool SetDefaultStyle(const wxTextAttr& style);
+    virtual const wxTextAttr& GetDefaultStyle() const;
+
+    // translate between the position (which is just an index in the text ctrl
+    // considering all its contents as a single strings) and (x, y) coordinates
+    // which represent column and line.
+    virtual long XYToPosition(long x, long y) const = 0;
+    virtual bool PositionToXY(long pos, long *x, long *y) const = 0;
+
+    virtual void ShowPosition(long pos) = 0;
+
+    // Clipboard operations
+    virtual void Copy() = 0;
+    virtual void Cut() = 0;
+    virtual void Paste() = 0;
+
+    virtual bool CanCopy() const;
+    virtual bool CanCut() const;
+    virtual bool CanPaste() const;
+
+    // Undo/redo
+    virtual void Undo() = 0;
+    virtual void Redo() = 0;
+
+    virtual bool CanUndo() const = 0;
+    virtual bool CanRedo() const = 0;
+
+    // Insertion point
+    virtual void SetInsertionPoint(long pos) = 0;
+    virtual void SetInsertionPointEnd() = 0;
+    virtual long GetInsertionPoint() const = 0;
+    virtual long GetLastPosition() const = 0;
+
+    virtual void SetSelection(long from, long to) = 0;
+    virtual void SelectAll();
+    virtual void SetEditable(bool editable) = 0;
+
+    // streambuf methods
+#ifndef NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+    int overflow(int i);
+    int sync();
+    int underflow();
+#endif // NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+
+    // stream-like insertion operators: these are always available, whether we
+    // were, or not, compiled with streambuf support
+    wxTextCtrl& operator<<(const wxString& s);
+    wxTextCtrl& operator<<(int i);
+    wxTextCtrl& operator<<(long i);
+    wxTextCtrl& operator<<(float f);
+    wxTextCtrl& operator<<(double d);
+    wxTextCtrl& operator<<(const wxChar c);
+
+    // obsolete functions
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+    bool Modified() const { return IsModified(); }
+#endif
+
+protected:
+    // the name of the last file loaded with LoadFile() which will be used by
+    // SaveFile() by default
+    wxString m_filename;
+
+    // the text style which will be used for any new text added to the control
+    wxTextAttr m_defaultStyle;
+
+private:
+#ifndef NO_TEXT_WINDOW_STREAM
+#if !wxUSE_IOSTREAMH
+    char *m_streambuf;
+#endif
+#endif
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-dependent class definition
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/textctrl.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/textctrl.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/textctrl.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/textctrl.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/textctrl.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/textctrl.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/textctrl.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/textctrl.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTextCtrl events
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if !WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_EVENT_TYPES
+
+BEGIN_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_UPDATED, 7)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_ENTER, 8)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_URL, 13)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_MAXLEN, 14)
+END_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+
+#endif // !WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_EVENT_TYPES
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextUrlEvent : public wxCommandEvent
+{
+public:
+    wxTextUrlEvent(int id, const wxMouseEvent& evtMouse,
+                   long start, long end)
+        : wxCommandEvent(wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_URL, id),
+          m_evtMouse(evtMouse)
+        { m_start = start; m_end = end; }
+
+    // get the mouse event which happend over the URL
+    const wxMouseEvent& GetMouseEvent() const { return m_evtMouse; }
+
+    // get the start of the URL
+    long GetURLStart() const { return m_start; }
+
+    // get the end of the URL
+    long GetURLEnd() const { return m_end; }
+
+protected:
+    // the corresponding mouse event
+    wxMouseEvent m_evtMouse;
+
+    // the start and end indices of the URL in the text control
+    long m_start,
+         m_end;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxTextUrlEvent)
+
+public:
+    // for wxWin RTTI only, don't use
+    wxTextUrlEvent() { }
+};
+
+typedef void (wxEvtHandler::*wxTextUrlEventFunction)(wxTextUrlEvent&);
+
+#define EVT_TEXT(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_UPDATED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL ),
+#define EVT_TEXT_ENTER(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_ENTER, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL ),
+#define EVT_TEXT_URL(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_URL, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) (wxTextUrlEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL ),
+#define EVT_TEXT_MAXLEN(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_COMMAND_TEXT_MAXLEN, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL ),
+
+#endif // wxUSE_TEXTCTRL
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_TEXTCTRL_H_BASE_

include/wx/tglbtn.h

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/tglbtn.h
+// Purpose:     This dummy header includes the proper header file for the
+//              system we're compiling under.
+// Author:      John Norris, minor changes by Axel Schlueter
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     08.02.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Johnny C. Norris II
+// License:     Rocketeer license
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_TOGGLEBUTTON_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_TOGGLEBUTTON_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_TOGGLEBTN
+
+#include "wx/event.h"
+#include "wx/control.h"     // base class
+
+BEGIN_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_TOGGLEBUTTON_CLICKED, 19)
+END_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+
+#define EVT_TOGGLEBUTTON(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_COMMAND_TOGGLEBUTTON_CLICKED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL ),
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/tglbtn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/tglbtn.h"
+/*
+# elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#  include "wx/motif/tglbtn.h"
+# elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#  include "wx/qt/tglbtn.h"
+# elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#  include "wx/mac/tglbtn.h"
+# elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#  include "wx/os2/tglbtn.h"
+# elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#  include "wx/stubs/tglbtn.h"
+*/
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_TOGGLEBTN
+
+#endif // _WX_TOGGLEBUTTON_H_BASE_
+

include/wx/timer.h

@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/timer.h
+// Purpose:     wxTimer, wxStopWatch and global time-related functions
+// Author:      Julian Smart (wxTimer), Sylvain Bougnoux (wxStopWatch)
+// Modified by: Vadim Zeitlin (wxTimerBase)
+//              Guillermo Rodriguez (global clean up)
+// Created:     04/01/98
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_TIMER_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_TIMER_H_BASE_
+
+#ifdef __GNUG__
+    #pragma interface "timerbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/setup.h"
+#include "wx/object.h"
+#include "wx/longlong.h"
+#include "wx/event.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI && wxUSE_TIMER
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTimer
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// the interface of wxTimer class
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTimerBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    // ctors and initializers
+    // ----------------------
+
+    // default: if you don't call SetOwner(), your only chance to get timer
+    // notifications is to override Notify() in the derived class
+    wxTimerBase() { Init(); SetOwner(NULL); }
+
+    // ctor which allows to avoid having to override Notify() in the derived
+    // class: the owner will get timer notifications which can be handled with
+    // EVT_TIMER
+    wxTimerBase(wxEvtHandler *owner, int id = -1)
+        { Init(); SetOwner(owner, id); }
+
+    // same as ctor above
+    void SetOwner(wxEvtHandler *owner, int id = -1)
+        { m_owner = owner; m_idTimer = id; }
+
+#ifdef __DARWIN__
+    virtual ~wxTimerBase() { }
+#endif
+
+    // working with the timer
+    // ----------------------
+
+    // start the timer: if milliseconds == -1, use the same value as for the
+    // last Start()
+    //
+    // it is now valid to call Start() multiple times: this just restarts the
+    // timer if it is already running
+    virtual bool Start(int milliseconds = -1, bool oneShot = FALSE);
+
+    // stop the timer
+    virtual void Stop() = 0;
+
+    // override this in your wxTimer-derived class if you want to process timer
+    // messages in it, use non default ctor or SetOwner() otherwise
+    virtual void Notify();
+
+    // getting info
+    // ------------
+
+    // return TRUE if the timer is running
+    virtual bool IsRunning() const = 0;
+
+    // get the (last) timer interval in the milliseconds
+    int GetInterval() const { return m_milli; }
+
+    // return TRUE if the timer is one shot
+    bool IsOneShot() const { return m_oneShot; }
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+    // deprecated functions
+    int Interval() const { return GetInterval(); };
+    bool OneShot() const { return IsOneShot(); }
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+
+protected:
+    // common part of all ctors
+    void Init() { m_oneShot = FALSE; m_milli = 0; }
+
+    wxEvtHandler *m_owner;
+    int     m_idTimer;
+
+    int     m_milli;        // the timer interval
+    bool    m_oneShot;      // TRUE if one shot
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTimer itself
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/timer.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/timer.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/timer.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/timer.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+    #include "wx/qt/timer.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/timer.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/timer.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+    #include "wx/stubs/timer.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTimerRunner: starts the timer in its ctor, stops in the dtor
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTimerRunner
+{
+public:
+    wxTimerRunner(wxTimer& timer) : m_timer(timer) { }
+    wxTimerRunner(wxTimer& timer, int milli, bool oneShot = FALSE)
+        : m_timer(timer)
+    {
+        m_timer.Start(milli, oneShot);
+    }
+
+    void Start(int milli, bool oneShot = FALSE)
+    {
+        m_timer.Start(milli, oneShot);
+    }
+
+    ~wxTimerRunner()
+    {
+        if ( m_timer.IsRunning() )
+        {
+            m_timer.Stop();
+        }
+    }
+
+private:
+    wxTimer& m_timer;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTimerEvent
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTimerEvent : public wxEvent
+{
+public:
+    wxTimerEvent(int id = 0, int interval = 0) : wxEvent(id)
+    {
+        m_eventType = wxEVT_TIMER;
+
+        m_interval = interval;
+    }
+
+    // accessors
+    int GetInterval() const { return m_interval; }
+
+private:
+    int m_interval;
+
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxTimerEvent)
+};
+
+typedef void (wxEvtHandler::*wxTimerEventFunction)(wxTimerEvent&);
+
+#define EVT_TIMER(id, func) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_TIMER, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxTimerEventFunction) & func, NULL),
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI && wxUSE_TIMER
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxStopWatch: measure time intervals with up to 1ms resolution
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_STOPWATCH
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxStopWatch
+{
+public:
+    // ctor starts the stop watch
+    wxStopWatch()        { Start(); }
+    void Start(long t = 0);
+    void Pause()  { m_pause = GetElapsedTime(); }
+    void Resume() { Start(m_pause); }
+
+    // get elapsed time since the last Start() or Pause() in milliseconds
+    long Time() const;
+
+protected:
+    // returns the elapsed time since t0
+    long GetElapsedTime() const;
+
+private:
+    wxLongLong m_t0;      // the time of the last Start()
+    long m_pause;         // the time of the last Pause() or 0
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_STOPWATCH
+
+#if wxUSE_LONGLONG
+
+// Starts a global timer
+// -- DEPRECATED: use wxStopWatch instead
+void WXDLLEXPORT wxStartTimer();
+
+// Gets elapsed milliseconds since last wxStartTimer or wxGetElapsedTime
+// -- DEPRECATED: use wxStopWatch instead
+long WXDLLEXPORT wxGetElapsedTime(bool resetTimer = TRUE);
+
+#endif // wxUSE_LONGLONG
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global time functions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Get number of seconds since local time 00:00:00 Jan 1st 1970.
+extern long WXDLLEXPORT wxGetLocalTime();
+
+// Get number of seconds since GMT 00:00:00, Jan 1st 1970.
+extern long WXDLLEXPORT wxGetUTCTime();
+
+#if wxUSE_LONGLONG
+// Get number of milliseconds since local time 00:00:00 Jan 1st 1970
+extern wxLongLong WXDLLEXPORT wxGetLocalTimeMillis();
+#endif // wxUSE_LONGLONG
+
+#define wxGetCurrentTime() wxGetLocalTime()
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_TIMER_H_BASE_

include/wx/toolbar.h

@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/toolbar.h
+// Purpose:     wxToolBar interface declaration
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     20.11.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_TOOLBAR_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_TOOLBAR_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/tbarbase.h"     // the base class for all toolbars
+
+#if wxUSE_TOOLBAR
+    #if !wxUSE_TOOLBAR_NATIVE || defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+        #include "wx/tbarsmpl.h"
+
+        class WXDLLEXPORT wxToolBar : public wxToolBarSimple
+        {
+        public:
+            wxToolBar() { }
+
+            wxToolBar(wxWindow *parent,
+                      wxWindowID id,
+                      const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                      const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                      long style = wxNO_BORDER | wxTB_HORIZONTAL,
+                      const wxString& name = wxToolBarNameStr)
+                : wxToolBarSimple(parent, id, pos, size, style, name) { }
+
+        private:
+            DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxToolBar)
+        };
+    #else // wxUSE_TOOLBAR_NATIVE
+        #if defined(__WXMSW__) && defined(__WIN95__)
+           #include "wx/msw/tbar95.h"
+        #elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+           #include "wx/msw/tbarmsw.h"
+        #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+           #include "wx/motif/toolbar.h"
+        #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+           #include "wx/gtk/tbargtk.h"
+        #elif defined(__WXQT__)
+           #include "wx/qt/tbarqt.h"
+        #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+           #include "wx/mac/toolbar.h"
+        #elif defined(__WXPM__)
+           #include "wx/os2/toolbar.h"
+        #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+           #include "wx/stubs/toolbar.h"
+        #endif
+    #endif // !wxUSE_TOOLBAR_NATIVE/wxUSE_TOOLBAR_NATIVE
+#endif // wxUSE_TOOLBAR
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_TOOLBAR_H_BASE_

include/wx/tooltip.h

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#ifndef _WX_TOOLTIP_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_TOOLTIP_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/tooltip.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+// #include "wx/motif/tooltip.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/tooltip.h"
+#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#include "wx/qt/tooltip.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/tooltip.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/tooltip.h"
+#elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+// #include "wx/stubs/tooltip.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_TOOLTIP_H_BASE_